HLS/HLSL Series Double Axis Precision Slide Cylinder (Roller Type)

• 

  View options

  Airtac HLS series: crossed-roller slide-table cylinder - HLS16X75S

  Specifications: HLS16X75S is a double-acting precision slide-table cylinder with a 16 mm bore, 75 mm stroke and built-in magnet. Its crossed-roller guide supports accurate linear travel. This is the standard layout. Fixed rubber cushioning; no optional stroke-stop assembly. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning HLS Crossed-roller slide table; standard layout 16 16 mm bore X75 75 mm stroke S Built-in magnet Technical specifications Parameter Details Action / working fluid Double acting / compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure — 2022 catalog 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Port M5 × 0.8 Standard cushioning Fixed rubber cushioning at both ends; selected stroke stops or shock absorbers as decoded above Guide / piston arrangement Crossed-roller guide with a twin-piston drive Applicable sensor family H profile: CMSH / DMSH / EMSH Current-model dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the matching catalog drawing definitions; M and N in the body table are hole counts. Symmetric and standard layouts share table values but are not the same installation orientation. Parameter Details A 162 mm AB 150 mm AC 151 mm JB 70 mm JC 61 mm KB 55 mm LB 35 mm LC 26 mm M 6 holes N 4 holes PA 90.5 mm PB 35 mm R 93.5 mm Parameter Details height 40 mm front plate height 36 mm width 60 mm front plate thickness 10 mm front mounting 4–M5×0.8 depth7 top fixture screw M5×0.8 depth6 bottom screw M6×1 depth12 bottom counterbore Ø9.5 top transverse pitch 35 mm bottom transverse pitch 26 mm rear mounting 2–M6×1 depth10 rear local callouts 37.5 / 20 / 48 / 16.5 front local callouts 12 / 6 / 26 / 4 positioning hole Ø5 +0.03/0 depth4 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Selected stops and accessory dimensions No optional A/AS/AF/B/BS/BF assembly is selected in this model. The fixed cushioning remains part of the base cylinder. Load and moment selection Parameter Details Reference Wmax 30 N; this is load weight, not kilograms Base / adjustable-stop allowable-energy reference Emax 0.1 J Hydraulic-stop Emax at a fitted B/BS/BF end 0.2 J; the opposite fixed-cushion end retains the base value on a single-end option Mpo maximum 78.8 N·m Myo maximum 71.9 N·m Mro maximum 48.6 N·m Mp maximum 17.6 N·m My maximum 17.6 N·m Mr maximum 8.9 N·m Compensation A 130 mm Compensation B 11 mm Compensation C 30 mm Mpo/Myo/Mro apply at the end of travel; Mp/My/Mr apply during travel. Compensation distances A/B/C in this load table are separate from body-dimension callouts with the same letters. Check the combined ratios Mp/Mpmax + My/Mymax + Mr/Mrmax ≤ 1, and separately Mpo/Mpomax + Myo/Myomax + Mro/Mromax ≤ 1. The catalog selection method uses E = 0.5 × (W/g) × (1.4 Va/1000)², with W in newtons, g = 9.81 m/s² and average speed Va in mm/s. Require E ≤ K × Emax and W ≤ K × β × Wmax. K is 1.0 for a top-mounted fixture and 0.6 for a front-mounted fixture; β is read from the speed-dependent load graph. Check actual offsets and all three moments, including stopping inertia. The catalog acceleration model is a = 1600(Va/1000)² with fixed cushioning or 400(Va/1000)² with hydraulic cushioning. For horizontal mounting, the catalog uses Mp = W(L1+A)/1000 and Mpo = Mp + Wa(L2+B)/(1000g). The transverse moment arm includes the guide offset C, giving C+L3. For vertical mounting, use the separate vertical formulas and add inertia to the static moment at the stroke end. The load/deflection graphs distinguish pitch, yaw and roll and the illustrated stroke; they do not promise zero deflection or one universal payload. The roll-deflection reference arm Lr for this bore is 89 mm. Mounting limits Parameter Details Tapped-hole body mounting M6 × 1.0; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 10 mm Vertical end mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 7 mm Front-face fixture mounting M6 × 1.0; maximum torque 7.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 10 mm Through-hole body mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 5.7 N·m; illustrated body thickness L 25 mm Top-face fixture mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 6 mm Keep screw penetration at least 0.5 mm below the maximum depth and within the actual detailed drawing. Mounting-table maxima do not override a shallower tapped hole shown in a particular view. Support the slide table while tightening fixture screws; holding only the body can transmit tightening torque into the guide and reduce accuracy. Maintain at least 3 mm separation from an adjacent magnetic cylinder to avoid sensor interference. Check all fixture clearances throughout travel. Use the selected symmetric or standard drawing for port access and stop placement. Begin flow adjustment slowly and remain within the energy, load and moment limits. Construction and materials The numbered entries follow the base-cylinder exploded drawing. Optional accessory assemblies are described separately above. Component Material 1 — Floating joint Low-carbon steel 2 — Bumper TPU 3 — Hex-socket screw Medium-carbon steel 4 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 5 — Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 6 — Rod seal NBR 7 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Bumper TPU 10 — Piston rod A Medium-carbon steel 11 — Piston rod B Stainless steel 12 — Body Aluminum alloy 13 — Magnet spacer Brass 14 — Magnet cushion NBR 15 — Magnet Sintered neodymium-iron-boron 16 — Piston seal NBR 17 — Piston Brass 18 — C retaining ring Spring steel 19 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 20 — Slide table Aluminum alloy 21 — Set screw Medium-carbon steel 22 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 23 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 24 — Crossed-roller guide assembly Assembly Series selection The standard strokes for the 16 mm bore are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100, 125 mm. Options are fixed cushioning, A/AS/AF adjustable stops and B/BS/BF hydraulic shock absorbers. The option suffix identifies the equipped end(s). M5 ports apply to bores 6–16 mm; PT, G or NPT 1/8 choices are listed for bores 20/25 mm. Other bores or strokes require a specifically defined order. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify H (CMSH / DMSH / EMSH)-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 16 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 0.5 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses M5 × 0.8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 Flow control / silencer example PTLM5 / BSLM5 Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm This slide uses a twin-piston drive. The general single-cylinder circuit example is only an initial reference; size the actual flow supply for the complete actuator and required cycle time. Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The HLS cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in a matching sensor groove on the HLS cylinder body. Detection uses the magnet included in this S configuration. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes Use PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder chamber port; use straight PC4M5 fittings at the M5 valve A/B ports and keep the chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. Seat the M5 sealing gaskets correctly. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each selected M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads The gray fittings/controllers accept soft nylon or PU tube at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended controller-cap rotation torque is 0.05 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Check insertion and wrench clearance. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 4 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSLM5 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (M5×0.8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 10/8 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 1012 g, from the 2022 base-cylinder weight-reference table. The catalog lists the symmetric layout with the corresponding standard family. Actual product weight governs; this is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $360.01

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac HLS series: crossed-roller slide-table cylinder - HLS8X75SAS

  Specifications: HLS8X75SAS is a double-acting precision slide-table cylinder with a 8 mm bore, 75 mm stroke and built-in magnet. Its crossed-roller guide supports accurate linear travel. This is the standard layout. Adjustable stroke stop at the forward end. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 slide, clamp and stopper accessories (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning HLS Crossed-roller slide table; standard layout 8 8 mm bore X75 75 mm stroke S Built-in magnet AS Adjustable stroke stop at the forward end Technical specifications Parameter Details Action / working fluid Double acting / compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure — 2022 catalog 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Port M5 × 0.8 Standard cushioning Fixed rubber cushioning at both ends; selected stroke stops or shock absorbers as decoded above Guide / piston arrangement Crossed-roller guide with a twin-piston drive Applicable sensor family H profile: CMSH / DMSH / EMSH Edition note: the linked earlier English catalog specifies 0.2 MPa minimum operating pressure for this bore. The 2022 Chinese catalog specifies 0.15 MPa; the table above follows 2022. Use the requirements for the supplied edition when selecting the lower working pressure. Current-model dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the matching catalog drawing definitions; M and N in the body table are hole counts. Symmetric and standard layouts share table values but are not the same installation orientation. Parameter Details A 158 mm AB 150.5 mm AC 151 mm JB 56 mm JC 83 mm KB 50 mm LB 28 mm LC 27 mm M 6 holes N 5 holes PA 94 mm PB 40 mm R 88.5 mm Parameter Details height 24 mm front plate height 21.5 mm width 40 mm front plate thickness 6 mm front mounting 4–M3×0.5 depth4 top fixture screw M3×0.5 depth5 bottom screw M4×0.7 depth8 bottom counterbore Ø6.5 top transverse pitch 23 mm bottom transverse pitch 15 mm rear mounting 2–M4×0.7 depth6 rear local callouts 22.5 / 12 / 30 / 13 front local callouts 6.5 / 3.5 / 15 / 4 positioning hole Ø3 +0.03/0 depth3 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Selected stops and accessory dimensions The catalog accessory code for this configuration is F-HLS8AS. A comprises AS + AF; B comprises BS + BF. Standard and symmetric rear-end accessories are not interchangeable; the forward BS assembly is shared between the HLQ and HLS families only where the selection table lists it. F-HLS8AS: Adjustable stroke stop at the forward end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 7 mm at this end. Parameter Details adjustment 5 mm A 8.5 mm B 21.5 mm C 14 mm D 21.5 mm E 11 mm F 4 mm M M8×1 P M3 length14 H 14.5 mm I 8 mm J 12 mm Q M3 length14 Accessory-table letters describe the body-side and slide-side parts in the separate accessory drawing. Its 5 mm screw-adjustment entry, when present, is a component reference; use the installed-cylinder limits above for the assembled configuration. Load and moment selection Parameter Details Reference Wmax 8 N; this is load weight, not kilograms Base / adjustable-stop allowable-energy reference Emax 0.024 J Hydraulic-stop Emax at a fitted B/BS/BF end 0.048 J; the opposite fixed-cushion end retains the base value on a single-end option Mpo maximum 32.8 N·m Myo maximum 35.3 N·m Mro maximum 16.4 N·m Mp maximum 4.6 N·m My maximum 4.6 N·m Mr maximum 1.8 N·m Compensation A 132 mm Compensation B 8.5 mm Compensation C 20 mm Mpo/Myo/Mro apply at the end of travel; Mp/My/Mr apply during travel. Compensation distances A/B/C in this load table are separate from body-dimension callouts with the same letters. Check the combined ratios Mp/Mpmax + My/Mymax + Mr/Mrmax ≤ 1, and separately Mpo/Mpomax + Myo/Myomax + Mro/Mromax ≤ 1. The catalog selection method uses E = 0.5 × (W/g) × (1.4 Va/1000)², with W in newtons, g = 9.81 m/s² and average speed Va in mm/s. Require E ≤ K × Emax and W ≤ K × β × Wmax. K is 1.0 for a top-mounted fixture and 0.6 for a front-mounted fixture; β is read from the speed-dependent load graph. Check actual offsets and all three moments, including stopping inertia. The catalog acceleration model is a = 1600(Va/1000)² with fixed cushioning or 400(Va/1000)² with hydraulic cushioning. For horizontal mounting, the catalog uses Mp = W(L1+A)/1000 and Mpo = Mp + Wa(L2+B)/(1000g). The transverse moment arm includes the guide offset C, giving C+L3. For vertical mounting, use the separate vertical formulas and add inertia to the static moment at the stroke end. The load/deflection graphs distinguish pitch, yaw and roll and the illustrated stroke; they do not promise zero deflection or one universal payload. The roll-deflection reference arm Lr for this bore is 50 mm. Mounting limits Parameter Details Tapped-hole body mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 8 mm Vertical end mounting M3 × 0.5; maximum torque 0.5 N·m; maximum screw penetration 4 mm Front-face fixture mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 6 mm Through-hole body mounting M3 × 0.5; maximum torque 1.2 N·m; illustrated body thickness L 12.5 mm Top-face fixture mounting M3 × 0.5; maximum torque 0.9 N·m; maximum screw penetration 5 mm Keep screw penetration at least 0.5 mm below the maximum depth and within the actual detailed drawing. Mounting-table maxima do not override a shallower tapped hole shown in a particular view. Support the slide table while tightening fixture screws; holding only the body can transmit tightening torque into the guide and reduce accuracy. Maintain at least 3 mm separation from an adjacent magnetic cylinder to avoid sensor interference. Check all fixture clearances throughout travel. Use the selected symmetric or standard drawing for port access and stop placement. Begin flow adjustment slowly and remain within the energy, load and moment limits. Construction and materials The numbered entries follow the base-cylinder exploded drawing. Optional accessory assemblies are described separately above. Component Material 1 — Floating joint Low-carbon steel 2 — Bumper TPU 3 — Hex-socket screw Medium-carbon steel 4 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 5 — Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 6 — Rod seal NBR 7 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Bumper TPU 10 — Piston rod A Medium-carbon steel 11 — Piston rod B Stainless steel 12 — Body Aluminum alloy 13 — Magnet spacer Brass 14 — Magnet cushion NBR 15 — Magnet Sintered neodymium-iron-boron 16 — Piston seal NBR 17 — Piston Brass 18 — C retaining ring Spring steel 19 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 20 — Slide table Aluminum alloy 21 — Set screw Medium-carbon steel 22 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 23 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 24 — Crossed-roller guide assembly Assembly Series selection The standard strokes for the 8 mm bore are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75 mm. Options are fixed cushioning, A/AS/AF adjustable stops and B/BS/BF hydraulic shock absorbers. The option suffix identifies the equipped end(s). M5 ports apply to bores 6–16 mm; PT, G or NPT 1/8 choices are listed for bores 20/25 mm. Other bores or strokes require a specifically defined order. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify H (CMSH / DMSH / EMSH)-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. This slide uses a twin-piston drive. The general single-cylinder circuit example is only an initial reference; size the actual flow supply for the complete actuator and required cycle time. Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The HLS cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in a matching sensor groove on the HLS cylinder body. Detection uses the magnet included in this S configuration. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional M5 connections and flow control If a 4×2.5 mm tube circuit is selected, choose PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 chamber port and keep the two chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. Select the directional valve separately for actual flow, pressure and connections; no 500 mm/s circuit is established here. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODStraight connection at each selected M5 cylinder chamber port, if used instead of a controller PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length Seat the M5 sealing gaskets correctly. These gray fittings/controllers accept soft nylon or PU tube. With the earlier English-edition cylinder, use this selected branch at 0.2–0.7 MPa; a confirmed 2022-edition cylinder permits 0.15–0.7 MPa. The common temperature limit is −20 to +70°C, subject to any lower connected-component limit. The 0.05 N·m controller-cap rotation recommendation is not thread-tightening torque. Check insertion and wrench clearance. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 10/8 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 396 g; an estimate using the same bore/stroke base cylinder. The published body weight does not separately include the selected accessory or port-thread variant, so this is not an official measured weight of the full configured assembly. The catalog lists the symmetric layout with the corresponding standard family. Actual product weight governs; this is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $325.87

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac HLS series: crossed-roller slide-table cylinder - HLS20X40ST

  Specifications: HLS20X40ST is a double-acting precision slide-table cylinder with a 20 mm bore, 40 mm stroke and built-in magnet. Its crossed-roller guide supports accurate linear travel. This is the standard layout. Fixed rubber cushioning; no optional stroke-stop assembly. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning HLS Crossed-roller slide table; standard layout 20 20 mm bore X40 40 mm stroke S Built-in magnet T NPT 1/8 port thread Technical specifications Parameter Details Action / working fluid Double acting / compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure — 2022 catalog 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Port NPT 1/8 Standard cushioning Fixed rubber cushioning at both ends; selected stroke stops or shock absorbers as decoded above Guide / piston arrangement Crossed-roller guide with a twin-piston drive Applicable sensor family H profile: CMSH / DMSH / EMSH Current-model dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the matching catalog drawing definitions; M and N in the body table are hole counts. Symmetric and standard layouts share table values but are not the same installation orientation. Parameter Details A 107 mm AB 91.5 mm AC 93 mm JB 35 mm JC 35 mm KB 60 mm LB 55 mm LC 15 mm M 4 holes N 2 holes S 50 mm PA 53.5 mm PB 10 mm R 62.5 mm Parameter Details height 50 mm front plate height 45 mm width 70 mm front plate thickness 13 mm front mounting 6–M5×0.8 depth8 top fixture screw M5×0.8 depth10 bottom screw M6×1 depth12 bottom counterbore Ø9.5 top transverse pitch 46 mm bottom transverse pitch 30 mm rear mounting 2–M6×1 depth13 rear local callouts 46.5 / 25 / 58 / 21 front local callouts 18 / 6 / 30 / 30 positioning hole Ø5 +0.03/0 depth5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Selected stops and accessory dimensions No optional A/AS/AF/B/BS/BF assembly is selected in this model. The fixed cushioning remains part of the base cylinder. Load and moment selection Parameter Details Reference Wmax 40 N; this is load weight, not kilograms Base / adjustable-stop allowable-energy reference Emax 0.13 J Hydraulic-stop Emax at a fitted B/BS/BF end 0.26 J; the opposite fixed-cushion end retains the base value on a single-end option Mpo maximum 60.1 N·m Myo maximum 50.5 N·m Mro maximum 72.8 N·m Mp maximum 16.3 N·m My maximum 16.3 N·m Mr maximum 15.2 N·m Compensation A 82 mm Compensation B 16.5 mm Compensation C 35 mm Mpo/Myo/Mro apply at the end of travel; Mp/My/Mr apply during travel. Compensation distances A/B/C in this load table are separate from body-dimension callouts with the same letters. Check the combined ratios Mp/Mpmax + My/Mymax + Mr/Mrmax ≤ 1, and separately Mpo/Mpomax + Myo/Myomax + Mro/Mromax ≤ 1. The catalog selection method uses E = 0.5 × (W/g) × (1.4 Va/1000)², with W in newtons, g = 9.81 m/s² and average speed Va in mm/s. Require E ≤ K × Emax and W ≤ K × β × Wmax. K is 1.0 for a top-mounted fixture and 0.6 for a front-mounted fixture; β is read from the speed-dependent load graph. Check actual offsets and all three moments, including stopping inertia. The catalog acceleration model is a = 1600(Va/1000)² with fixed cushioning or 400(Va/1000)² with hydraulic cushioning. For horizontal mounting, the catalog uses Mp = W(L1+A)/1000 and Mpo = Mp + Wa(L2+B)/(1000g). The transverse moment arm includes the guide offset C, giving C+L3. For vertical mounting, use the separate vertical formulas and add inertia to the static moment at the stroke end. The load/deflection graphs distinguish pitch, yaw and roll and the illustrated stroke; they do not promise zero deflection or one universal payload. The roll-deflection reference arm Lr for this bore is 122 mm. Mounting limits Parameter Details Tapped-hole body mounting M6 × 1.0; maximum torque 7.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 12 mm Vertical end mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 8 mm Front-face fixture mounting M6 × 1.0; maximum torque 7.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 13 mm Through-hole body mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 5.7 N·m; illustrated body thickness L 28 mm Top-face fixture mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 10 mm Keep screw penetration at least 0.5 mm below the maximum depth and within the actual detailed drawing. Mounting-table maxima do not override a shallower tapped hole shown in a particular view. Support the slide table while tightening fixture screws; holding only the body can transmit tightening torque into the guide and reduce accuracy. Maintain at least 3 mm separation from an adjacent magnetic cylinder to avoid sensor interference. Check all fixture clearances throughout travel. Use the selected symmetric or standard drawing for port access and stop placement. Begin flow adjustment slowly and remain within the energy, load and moment limits. Construction and materials The numbered entries follow the base-cylinder exploded drawing. Optional accessory assemblies are described separately above. Component Material 1 — Floating joint Low-carbon steel 2 — Bumper TPU 3 — Hex-socket screw Medium-carbon steel 4 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 5 — Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 6 — Rod seal NBR 7 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Bumper TPU 10 — Piston rod A Medium-carbon steel 11 — Piston rod B Stainless steel 12 — Body Aluminum alloy 13 — Magnet spacer Brass 14 — Magnet cushion NBR 15 — Magnet Sintered neodymium-iron-boron 16 — Piston seal NBR 17 — Piston Brass 18 — C retaining ring Spring steel 19 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 20 — Slide table Aluminum alloy 21 — Set screw Medium-carbon steel 22 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 23 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 24 — Crossed-roller guide assembly Assembly Series selection The standard strokes for the 20 mm bore are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150 mm. Options are fixed cushioning, A/AS/AF adjustable stops and B/BS/BF hydraulic shock absorbers. The option suffix identifies the equipped end(s). M5 ports apply to bores 6–16 mm; PT, G or NPT 1/8 choices are listed for bores 20/25 mm. Other bores or strokes require a specifically defined order. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify H (CMSH / DMSH / EMSH)-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 20 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 0.8 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT 1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 Flow control / silencer example PTLM5 / BSLM5 Tube outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm This slide uses a twin-piston drive. The general single-cylinder circuit example is only an initial reference; size the actual flow supply for the complete actuator and required cycle time. Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The HLS cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in a matching sensor groove on the HLS cylinder body. Detection uses the magnet included in this S configuration. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 1/4 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 6 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC1/4-1/8: NPT1/8 male × exact 1/4 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL1/4-1/8A: NPT1/8 male × exact 1/4 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC6M5: M5×0.8 male × 6 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B work ports PC601: PT1/8 male × 6 mm tube ODOnly for the separate 4A pilot port when its line uses this exact metric tube OD US98A060040100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 6 mm OD × 4 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A060040100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 6 mm OD × 4 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: M5×0.8 female main ports; M5×0.8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: M5×0.8 female main ports; M5×0.8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: M5×0.8 female main ports; M5×0.8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: M5×0.8 female main ports; M5×0.8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: M5×0.8 female main ports; M5×0.8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.08 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Catalog listing does not establish current stock. The following complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 6 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSLM5 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (M5×0.8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 15/12 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 1056 g; an estimate using the same bore/stroke base cylinder. The published body weight does not separately include the selected accessory or port-thread variant, so this is not an official measured weight of the full configured assembly. The catalog lists the symmetric layout with the corresponding standard family. Actual product weight governs; this is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $309.46

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac HLS series: crossed-roller slide-table cylinder - HLS20X50SB

  Specifications: HLS20X50SB is a double-acting precision slide-table cylinder with a 20 mm bore, 50 mm stroke and built-in magnet. Its crossed-roller guide supports accurate linear travel. This is the standard layout. Hydraulic shock absorbers at both ends. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 slide, clamp and stopper accessories (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning HLS Crossed-roller slide table; standard layout 20 20 mm bore X50 50 mm stroke S Built-in magnet B Hydraulic shock absorbers at both ends Technical specifications Parameter Details Action / working fluid Double acting / compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure — 2022 catalog 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Port PT 1/8 Standard cushioning Fixed rubber cushioning at both ends; selected stroke stops or shock absorbers as decoded above Guide / piston arrangement Crossed-roller guide with a twin-piston drive Applicable sensor family H profile: CMSH / DMSH / EMSH Current-model dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the matching catalog drawing definitions; M and N in the body table are hole counts. Symmetric and standard layouts share table values but are not the same installation orientation. Parameter Details A 122 mm AB 106.5 mm AC 108 mm JB 35 mm JC 50 mm KB 35 mm LB 35 mm LC 15 mm M 6 holes N 3 holes S 35 mm PA 68.5 mm PB 10 mm R 72.5 mm Parameter Details height 50 mm front plate height 45 mm width 70 mm front plate thickness 13 mm front mounting 6–M5×0.8 depth8 top fixture screw M5×0.8 depth10 bottom screw M6×1 depth12 bottom counterbore Ø9.5 top transverse pitch 46 mm bottom transverse pitch 30 mm rear mounting 2–M6×1 depth13 rear local callouts 46.5 / 25 / 58 / 21 front local callouts 18 / 6 / 30 / 30 positioning hole Ø5 +0.03/0 depth5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Selected stops and accessory dimensions The catalog accessory code for this configuration is F-HLS20B. A comprises AS + AF; B comprises BS + BF. Standard and symmetric rear-end accessories are not interchangeable; the forward BS assembly is shared between the HLQ and HLS families only where the selection table lists it. F-HLQ20BS: Hydraulic shock absorber at the forward end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 23.5 mm at this end. Parameter Details A 15 mm B 44.5 mm C 20 mm D 22 mm E 53.5 mm E1 10 mm F 17 mm G 11 mm M M12×1 P M6 length20 H 25 mm I 12.5 mm J 21 mm Q M6 length20 F-HLS20BF: Hydraulic shock absorber at the retracting end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 25 mm at this end. Parameter Details A 45.5 mm B 47 mm C 28.5 mm D 23 mm E 53.5 mm E1 10 mm F 15 mm G 17 mm H 11 mm J M12×1 P M5 length16 Accessory-table letters describe the body-side and slide-side parts in the separate accessory drawing. Its 5 mm screw-adjustment entry, when present, is a component reference; use the installed-cylinder limits above for the assembled configuration. Parameter Details Specified shock absorber ACA1210-1N Maximum shock-absorber retaining-nut torque 3.14 N·m Do not adjust or remove the set screw at the back of the shock absorber: this can release oil and disable damping. A single-end BS or BF option provides hydraulic damping only at that specified end. Load and moment selection Parameter Details Reference Wmax 40 N; this is load weight, not kilograms Base / adjustable-stop allowable-energy reference Emax 0.13 J Hydraulic-stop Emax at a fitted B/BS/BF end 0.26 J; the opposite fixed-cushion end retains the base value on a single-end option Mpo maximum 60.1 N·m Myo maximum 50.5 N·m Mro maximum 72.8 N·m Mp maximum 16.6 N·m My maximum 16.6 N·m Mr maximum 15.2 N·m Compensation A 92 mm Compensation B 16.5 mm Compensation C 35 mm Mpo/Myo/Mro apply at the end of travel; Mp/My/Mr apply during travel. Compensation distances A/B/C in this load table are separate from body-dimension callouts with the same letters. Check the combined ratios Mp/Mpmax + My/Mymax + Mr/Mrmax ≤ 1, and separately Mpo/Mpomax + Myo/Myomax + Mro/Mromax ≤ 1. The catalog selection method uses E = 0.5 × (W/g) × (1.4 Va/1000)², with W in newtons, g = 9.81 m/s² and average speed Va in mm/s. Require E ≤ K × Emax and W ≤ K × β × Wmax. K is 1.0 for a top-mounted fixture and 0.6 for a front-mounted fixture; β is read from the speed-dependent load graph. Check actual offsets and all three moments, including stopping inertia. The catalog acceleration model is a = 1600(Va/1000)² with fixed cushioning or 400(Va/1000)² with hydraulic cushioning. For horizontal mounting, the catalog uses Mp = W(L1+A)/1000 and Mpo = Mp + Wa(L2+B)/(1000g). The transverse moment arm includes the guide offset C, giving C+L3. For vertical mounting, use the separate vertical formulas and add inertia to the static moment at the stroke end. The load/deflection graphs distinguish pitch, yaw and roll and the illustrated stroke; they do not promise zero deflection or one universal payload. The roll-deflection reference arm Lr for this bore is 122 mm. Mounting limits Parameter Details Tapped-hole body mounting M6 × 1.0; maximum torque 7.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 12 mm Vertical end mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 8 mm Front-face fixture mounting M6 × 1.0; maximum torque 7.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 13 mm Through-hole body mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 5.7 N·m; illustrated body thickness L 28 mm Top-face fixture mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 10 mm Keep screw penetration at least 0.5 mm below the maximum depth and within the actual detailed drawing. Mounting-table maxima do not override a shallower tapped hole shown in a particular view. Support the slide table while tightening fixture screws; holding only the body can transmit tightening torque into the guide and reduce accuracy. Maintain at least 3 mm separation from an adjacent magnetic cylinder to avoid sensor interference. Check all fixture clearances throughout travel. Use the selected symmetric or standard drawing for port access and stop placement. Begin flow adjustment slowly and remain within the energy, load and moment limits. Construction and materials The numbered entries follow the base-cylinder exploded drawing. Optional accessory assemblies are described separately above. Component Material 1 — Floating joint Low-carbon steel 2 — Bumper TPU 3 — Hex-socket screw Medium-carbon steel 4 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 5 — Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 6 — Rod seal NBR 7 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Bumper TPU 10 — Piston rod A Medium-carbon steel 11 — Piston rod B Stainless steel 12 — Body Aluminum alloy 13 — Magnet spacer Brass 14 — Magnet cushion NBR 15 — Magnet Sintered neodymium-iron-boron 16 — Piston seal NBR 17 — Piston Brass 18 — C retaining ring Spring steel 19 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 20 — Slide table Aluminum alloy 21 — Set screw Medium-carbon steel 22 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 23 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 24 — Crossed-roller guide assembly Assembly Series selection The standard strokes for the 20 mm bore are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150 mm. Options are fixed cushioning, A/AS/AF adjustable stops and B/BS/BF hydraulic shock absorbers. The option suffix identifies the equipped end(s). M5 ports apply to bores 6–16 mm; PT, G or NPT 1/8 choices are listed for bores 20/25 mm. Other bores or strokes require a specifically defined order. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify H (CMSH / DMSH / EMSH)-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 20 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 0.8 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT 1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 Flow control / silencer example PTLM5 / BSLM5 Tube outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm This slide uses a twin-piston drive. The general single-cylinder circuit example is only an initial reference; size the actual flow supply for the complete actuator and required cycle time. Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The HLS cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in a matching sensor groove on the HLS cylinder body. Detection uses the magnet included in this S configuration. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls Choose the listed straight fitting or A-type controller at each PT1/8 cylinder chamber port and the specified straight fittings at the separate valve A/B ports; keep both chamber lines separate. The A-type restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. PC601: PT1/8 male × 6 mm tube ODStraight connection at the cylinder port; no speed adjustment; also connects the separate 4A pilot ports if their lines use the same tube OD PTL601A: PT1/8 male × 6 mm tube OD; A-typeCylinder-port meter-out speed control instead of the straight fitting PC6M5: M5×0.8 male × 6 mm tube ODStraight connection at the selected valve A/B work ports US98A060040100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 6 mm OD × 4 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A060040100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 6 mm OD × 4 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: M5×0.8 female main ports; M5×0.8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: M5×0.8 female main ports; M5×0.8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: M5×0.8 female main ports; M5×0.8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: M5×0.8 female main ports; M5×0.8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: M5×0.8 female main ports; M5×0.8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction Fittings/controllers accept exact 6 mm OD soft nylon/PU tubing at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended cap-rotation torque is 0.08 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Seal tapered PT connections correctly. Seat the M5 valve-side gasket correctly. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 6 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSLM5 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (M5×0.8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 15/12 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 1154 g; an estimate using the same bore/stroke base cylinder. The published body weight does not separately include the selected accessory or port-thread variant, so this is not an official measured weight of the full configured assembly. The catalog lists the symmetric layout with the corresponding standard family. Actual product weight governs; this is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $442.10

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac HLS series: crossed-roller slide-table cylinder - HLS6X10SAS

  Specifications: HLS6X10SAS is a double-acting precision slide-table cylinder with a 6 mm bore, 10 mm stroke and built-in magnet. Its crossed-roller guide supports accurate linear travel. This is the standard layout. Adjustable stroke stop at the forward end. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 slide, clamp and stopper accessories (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning HLS Crossed-roller slide table; standard layout 6 6 mm bore X10 10 mm stroke S Built-in magnet AS Adjustable stroke stop at the forward end Technical specifications Parameter Details Action / working fluid Double acting / compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure — 2022 catalog 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Port M5 × 0.8 Standard cushioning Fixed rubber cushioning at both ends; selected stroke stops or shock absorbers as decoded above Guide / piston arrangement Crossed-roller guide with a twin-piston drive Applicable sensor family H profile: CMSH / DMSH / EMSH Edition note: the linked earlier English catalog specifies 0.2 MPa minimum operating pressure for this bore. The 2022 Chinese catalog specifies 0.15 MPa; the table above follows 2022. Use the requirements for the supplied edition when selecting the lower working pressure. Current-model dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the matching catalog drawing definitions; M and N in the body table are hole counts. Symmetric and standard layouts share table values but are not the same installation orientation. Parameter Details A 48 mm AB 41.5 mm AC 42 mm JB 20 mm JC 11 mm KB 20 mm LB 25 mm LC 6 mm M 4 holes N 2 holes PA 19 mm PB 8 mm R 21.5 mm Parameter Details height 20 mm front plate height 17.5 mm width 30 mm front plate thickness 5 mm front mounting 4–M2.5×0.45 depth3.5 top fixture screw M3×0.5 depth4 bottom screw M4×0.7 depth8 bottom counterbore Ø6.5 top transverse pitch 18 mm bottom transverse pitch 12 mm rear mounting 2–M3×0.5 depth5 rear local callouts 19.5 / 10 / 24 / 10 / 5 front local callouts 5.5 / 3 / 12 positioning hole Ø3 +0.03/0 depth2.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Mounting-table note: the front fixture screw is printed as M3 × 0.4 in the installation table, while the corresponding detailed drawing uses M3 × 0.5. Select the screw against the actual mating thread and supplied drawing; do not force one pitch into the other. Selected stops and accessory dimensions The catalog accessory code for this configuration is F-HLS6AS. A comprises AS + AF; B comprises BS + BF. Standard and symmetric rear-end accessories are not interchangeable; the forward BS assembly is shared between the HLQ and HLS families only where the selection table lists it. F-HLS6AS: Adjustable stroke stop at the forward end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 5 mm at this end. Parameter Details adjustment 5 mm A 7 mm B 19 mm C 10.5 mm D 16.5 mm E 8 mm F 3 mm M M6×1 P M2.5 length10 H 12.5 mm I 6.5 mm J 10.5 mm Q M2.5 length10 Accessory-table letters describe the body-side and slide-side parts in the separate accessory drawing. Its 5 mm screw-adjustment entry, when present, is a component reference; use the installed-cylinder limits above for the assembled configuration. Load and moment selection Parameter Details Reference Wmax 4 N; this is load weight, not kilograms Base / adjustable-stop allowable-energy reference Emax 0.01 J Mpo maximum 3.3 N·m Myo maximum 3.8 N·m Mro maximum 2.6 N·m Mp maximum 0.7 N·m My maximum 0.7 N·m Mr maximum 0.6 N·m Compensation A 27 mm Compensation B 7.3 mm Compensation C 16 mm Mpo/Myo/Mro apply at the end of travel; Mp/My/Mr apply during travel. Compensation distances A/B/C in this load table are separate from body-dimension callouts with the same letters. Check the combined ratios Mp/Mpmax + My/Mymax + Mr/Mrmax ≤ 1, and separately Mpo/Mpomax + Myo/Myomax + Mro/Mromax ≤ 1. The catalog selection method uses E = 0.5 × (W/g) × (1.4 Va/1000)², with W in newtons, g = 9.81 m/s² and average speed Va in mm/s. Require E ≤ K × Emax and W ≤ K × β × Wmax. K is 1.0 for a top-mounted fixture and 0.6 for a front-mounted fixture; β is read from the speed-dependent load graph. Check actual offsets and all three moments, including stopping inertia. The catalog acceleration model is a = 1600(Va/1000)² with fixed cushioning or 400(Va/1000)² with hydraulic cushioning. For horizontal mounting, the catalog uses Mp = W(L1+A)/1000 and Mpo = Mp + Wa(L2+B)/(1000g). The transverse moment arm includes the guide offset C, giving C+L3. For vertical mounting, use the separate vertical formulas and add inertia to the static moment at the stroke end. The load/deflection graphs distinguish pitch, yaw and roll and the illustrated stroke; they do not promise zero deflection or one universal payload. The roll-deflection reference arm Lr for this bore is 24 mm. Mounting limits Parameter Details Tapped-hole body mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 8 mm Vertical end mounting M2.5 × 0.45; maximum torque 0.5 N·m; maximum screw penetration 3.5 mm Front-face fixture mounting M3 × 0.4 (printed installation-table value); maximum torque 0.9 N·m; maximum screw penetration 5 mm Through-hole body mounting M3 × 0.5; maximum torque 1.2 N·m; illustrated body thickness L 11 mm Top-face fixture mounting M3 × 0.5; maximum torque 0.9 N·m; maximum screw penetration 4 mm Keep screw penetration at least 0.5 mm below the maximum depth and within the actual detailed drawing. Mounting-table maxima do not override a shallower tapped hole shown in a particular view. Support the slide table while tightening fixture screws; holding only the body can transmit tightening torque into the guide and reduce accuracy. Maintain at least 3 mm separation from an adjacent magnetic cylinder to avoid sensor interference. Check all fixture clearances throughout travel. Use the selected symmetric or standard drawing for port access and stop placement. Begin flow adjustment slowly and remain within the energy, load and moment limits. Construction and materials The numbered entries follow the base-cylinder exploded drawing. Optional accessory assemblies are described separately above. Component Material 1 — Floating joint Low-carbon steel 2 — Bumper TPU 3 — Hex-socket screw Medium-carbon steel 4 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 5 — Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 6 — Rod seal NBR 7 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Bumper TPU 10 — Piston rod A Medium-carbon steel 11 — Piston rod B Stainless steel 12 — Body Aluminum alloy 13 — Magnet spacer Brass 14 — Magnet cushion NBR 15 — Magnet Sintered neodymium-iron-boron 16 — Piston seal NBR 17 — Piston Brass 18 — C retaining ring Spring steel 19 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 20 — Slide table Aluminum alloy 21 — Set screw Medium-carbon steel 22 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 23 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 24 — Crossed-roller guide assembly Assembly Series selection The standard strokes for the 6 mm bore are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50 mm. Options are fixed cushioning, A/AS/AF adjustable stops and no hydraulic-stop option at the 6 mm bore. M5 ports apply to bores 6–16 mm; PT, G or NPT 1/8 choices are listed for bores 20/25 mm. Other bores or strokes require a specifically defined order. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify H (CMSH / DMSH / EMSH)-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 6 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 0.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses M5 × 0.8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 Flow control / silencer example PTLM5 / BSLM5 Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm This slide uses a twin-piston drive. The general single-cylinder circuit example is only an initial reference; size the actual flow supply for the complete actuator and required cycle time. Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The HLS cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in a matching sensor groove on the HLS cylinder body. Detection uses the magnet included in this S configuration. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes Use PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder chamber port; use straight PC4M5 fittings at the M5 valve A/B ports and keep the chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. Seat the M5 sealing gaskets correctly. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each selected M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads The gray fittings/controllers accept soft nylon or PU tube at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended controller-cap rotation torque is 0.05 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Check insertion and wrench clearance. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 4 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. With the earlier English-edition cylinder, use this selected 5V/4A branch at 0.2–0.7 MPa; a confirmed 2022-edition cylinder permits 0.15–0.7 MPa. The common temperature limit is −20 to +70°C. Apply temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSLM5 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (M5×0.8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 10/8 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 72 g; an estimate using the same bore/stroke base cylinder. The published body weight does not separately include the selected accessory or port-thread variant, so this is not an official measured weight of the full configured assembly. The catalog lists the symmetric layout with the corresponding standard family. Actual product weight governs; this is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $217.75

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac HLS series: crossed-roller slide-table cylinder - HLS8X50S

  Specifications: HLS8X50S is a double-acting precision slide-table cylinder with a 8 mm bore, 50 mm stroke and built-in magnet. Its crossed-roller guide supports accurate linear travel. This is the standard layout. Fixed rubber cushioning; no optional stroke-stop assembly. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning HLS Crossed-roller slide table; standard layout 8 8 mm bore X50 50 mm stroke S Built-in magnet Technical specifications Parameter Details Action / working fluid Double acting / compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure — 2022 catalog 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Port M5 × 0.8 Standard cushioning Fixed rubber cushioning at both ends; selected stroke stops or shock absorbers as decoded above Guide / piston arrangement Crossed-roller guide with a twin-piston drive Applicable sensor family H profile: CMSH / DMSH / EMSH Edition note: the linked earlier English catalog specifies 0.2 MPa minimum operating pressure for this bore. The 2022 Chinese catalog specifies 0.15 MPa; the table above follows 2022. Use the requirements for the supplied edition when selecting the lower working pressure. Current-model dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the matching catalog drawing definitions; M and N in the body table are hole counts. Symmetric and standard layouts share table values but are not the same installation orientation. Parameter Details A 108 mm AB 100.5 mm AC 101 mm JB 46 mm JC 43 mm KB 38 mm LB 23 mm LC 20 mm M 6 holes N 4 holes PA 68 mm PB 16 mm R 63.5 mm Parameter Details height 24 mm front plate height 21.5 mm width 40 mm front plate thickness 6 mm front mounting 4–M3×0.5 depth4 top fixture screw M3×0.5 depth5 bottom screw M4×0.7 depth8 bottom counterbore Ø6.5 top transverse pitch 23 mm bottom transverse pitch 15 mm rear mounting 2–M4×0.7 depth6 rear local callouts 22.5 / 12 / 30 / 13 front local callouts 6.5 / 3.5 / 15 / 4 positioning hole Ø3 +0.03/0 depth3 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Selected stops and accessory dimensions No optional A/AS/AF/B/BS/BF assembly is selected in this model. The fixed cushioning remains part of the base cylinder. Load and moment selection Parameter Details Reference Wmax 8 N; this is load weight, not kilograms Base / adjustable-stop allowable-energy reference Emax 0.024 J Hydraulic-stop Emax at a fitted B/BS/BF end 0.048 J; the opposite fixed-cushion end retains the base value on a single-end option Mpo maximum 23.6 N·m Myo maximum 24.8 N·m Mro maximum 13.9 N·m Mp maximum 4.4 N·m My maximum 4.4 N·m Mr maximum 2.1 N·m Compensation A 92 mm Compensation B 8.5 mm Compensation C 20 mm Mpo/Myo/Mro apply at the end of travel; Mp/My/Mr apply during travel. Compensation distances A/B/C in this load table are separate from body-dimension callouts with the same letters. Check the combined ratios Mp/Mpmax + My/Mymax + Mr/Mrmax ≤ 1, and separately Mpo/Mpomax + Myo/Myomax + Mro/Mromax ≤ 1. The catalog selection method uses E = 0.5 × (W/g) × (1.4 Va/1000)², with W in newtons, g = 9.81 m/s² and average speed Va in mm/s. Require E ≤ K × Emax and W ≤ K × β × Wmax. K is 1.0 for a top-mounted fixture and 0.6 for a front-mounted fixture; β is read from the speed-dependent load graph. Check actual offsets and all three moments, including stopping inertia. The catalog acceleration model is a = 1600(Va/1000)² with fixed cushioning or 400(Va/1000)² with hydraulic cushioning. For horizontal mounting, the catalog uses Mp = W(L1+A)/1000 and Mpo = Mp + Wa(L2+B)/(1000g). The transverse moment arm includes the guide offset C, giving C+L3. For vertical mounting, use the separate vertical formulas and add inertia to the static moment at the stroke end. The load/deflection graphs distinguish pitch, yaw and roll and the illustrated stroke; they do not promise zero deflection or one universal payload. The roll-deflection reference arm Lr for this bore is 50 mm. Mounting limits Parameter Details Tapped-hole body mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 8 mm Vertical end mounting M3 × 0.5; maximum torque 0.5 N·m; maximum screw penetration 4 mm Front-face fixture mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 6 mm Through-hole body mounting M3 × 0.5; maximum torque 1.2 N·m; illustrated body thickness L 12.5 mm Top-face fixture mounting M3 × 0.5; maximum torque 0.9 N·m; maximum screw penetration 5 mm Keep screw penetration at least 0.5 mm below the maximum depth and within the actual detailed drawing. Mounting-table maxima do not override a shallower tapped hole shown in a particular view. Support the slide table while tightening fixture screws; holding only the body can transmit tightening torque into the guide and reduce accuracy. Maintain at least 3 mm separation from an adjacent magnetic cylinder to avoid sensor interference. Check all fixture clearances throughout travel. Use the selected symmetric or standard drawing for port access and stop placement. Begin flow adjustment slowly and remain within the energy, load and moment limits. Construction and materials The numbered entries follow the base-cylinder exploded drawing. Optional accessory assemblies are described separately above. Component Material 1 — Floating joint Low-carbon steel 2 — Bumper TPU 3 — Hex-socket screw Medium-carbon steel 4 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 5 — Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 6 — Rod seal NBR 7 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Bumper TPU 10 — Piston rod A Medium-carbon steel 11 — Piston rod B Stainless steel 12 — Body Aluminum alloy 13 — Magnet spacer Brass 14 — Magnet cushion NBR 15 — Magnet Sintered neodymium-iron-boron 16 — Piston seal NBR 17 — Piston Brass 18 — C retaining ring Spring steel 19 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 20 — Slide table Aluminum alloy 21 — Set screw Medium-carbon steel 22 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 23 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 24 — Crossed-roller guide assembly Assembly Series selection The standard strokes for the 8 mm bore are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75 mm. Options are fixed cushioning, A/AS/AF adjustable stops and B/BS/BF hydraulic shock absorbers. The option suffix identifies the equipped end(s). M5 ports apply to bores 6–16 mm; PT, G or NPT 1/8 choices are listed for bores 20/25 mm. Other bores or strokes require a specifically defined order. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify H (CMSH / DMSH / EMSH)-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. This slide uses a twin-piston drive. The general single-cylinder circuit example is only an initial reference; size the actual flow supply for the complete actuator and required cycle time. Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The HLS cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in a matching sensor groove on the HLS cylinder body. Detection uses the magnet included in this S configuration. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional M5 connections and flow control If a 4×2.5 mm tube circuit is selected, choose PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 chamber port and keep the two chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. Select the directional valve separately for actual flow, pressure and connections; no 500 mm/s circuit is established here. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODStraight connection at each selected M5 cylinder chamber port, if used instead of a controller PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length Seat the M5 sealing gaskets correctly. These gray fittings/controllers accept soft nylon or PU tube. With the earlier English-edition cylinder, use this selected branch at 0.2–0.7 MPa; a confirmed 2022-edition cylinder permits 0.15–0.7 MPa. The common temperature limit is −20 to +70°C, subject to any lower connected-component limit. The 0.05 N·m controller-cap rotation recommendation is not thread-tightening torque. Check insertion and wrench clearance. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 10/8 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 278 g, from the 2022 base-cylinder weight-reference table. The catalog lists the symmetric layout with the corresponding standard family. Actual product weight governs; this is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $238.46

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac HLS series: crossed-roller slide-table cylinder - HLS16X30SA

  Specifications: HLS16X30SA is a double-acting precision slide-table cylinder with a 16 mm bore, 30 mm stroke and built-in magnet. Its crossed-roller guide supports accurate linear travel. This is the standard layout. Adjustable stroke stops at both ends. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 slide, clamp and stopper accessories (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning HLS Crossed-roller slide table; standard layout 16 16 mm bore X30 30 mm stroke S Built-in magnet A Adjustable stroke stops at both ends Technical specifications Parameter Details Action / working fluid Double acting / compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure — 2022 catalog 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Port M5 × 0.8 Standard cushioning Fixed rubber cushioning at both ends; selected stroke stops or shock absorbers as decoded above Guide / piston arrangement Crossed-roller guide with a twin-piston drive Applicable sensor family H profile: CMSH / DMSH / EMSH Current-model dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the matching catalog drawing definitions; M and N in the body table are hole counts. Symmetric and standard layouts share table values but are not the same installation orientation. Parameter Details A 87 mm AB 75 mm AC 76 mm JB 40 mm JC 16 mm KB 35 mm LB 40 mm LC 16 mm M 4 holes N 2 holes PA 42.5 mm PB 8 mm R 48.5 mm Parameter Details height 40 mm front plate height 36 mm width 60 mm front plate thickness 10 mm front mounting 4–M5×0.8 depth7 top fixture screw M5×0.8 depth6 bottom screw M6×1 depth12 bottom counterbore Ø9.5 top transverse pitch 35 mm bottom transverse pitch 26 mm rear mounting 2–M6×1 depth10 rear local callouts 37.5 / 20 / 48 / 16.5 front local callouts 12 / 6 / 26 / 4 positioning hole Ø5 +0.03/0 depth4 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Selected stops and accessory dimensions The catalog accessory code for this configuration is F-HLS16A. A comprises AS + AF; B comprises BS + BF. Standard and symmetric rear-end accessories are not interchangeable; the forward BS assembly is shared between the HLQ and HLS families only where the selection table lists it. F-HLS16AS: Adjustable stroke stop at the forward end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 6 mm at this end. Parameter Details adjustment 5 mm A 12 mm B 36 mm C 17.5 mm D 24 mm E 14 mm F 5 mm M M10×1 P M5 length16 H 23 mm I 10.5 mm J 17 mm Q M5 length16 F-HLS16AF: Adjustable stroke stop at the retracting end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 6.5 mm at this end. Parameter Details adjustment 5 mm A 37 mm B 37.5 mm C 23 mm D 18 mm E 24 mm F 12 mm G 14 mm H 5 mm J M5 length12 K M10×1 Accessory-table letters describe the body-side and slide-side parts in the separate accessory drawing. Its 5 mm screw-adjustment entry, when present, is a component reference; use the installed-cylinder limits above for the assembled configuration. Load and moment selection Parameter Details Reference Wmax 30 N; this is load weight, not kilograms Base / adjustable-stop allowable-energy reference Emax 0.1 J Hydraulic-stop Emax at a fitted B/BS/BF end 0.2 J; the opposite fixed-cushion end retains the base value on a single-end option Mpo maximum 33 N·m Myo maximum 34.3 N·m Mro maximum 30.9 N·m Mp maximum 9.5 N·m My maximum 9.5 N·m Mr maximum 7.6 N·m Compensation A 63 mm Compensation B 11 mm Compensation C 30 mm Mpo/Myo/Mro apply at the end of travel; Mp/My/Mr apply during travel. Compensation distances A/B/C in this load table are separate from body-dimension callouts with the same letters. Check the combined ratios Mp/Mpmax + My/Mymax + Mr/Mrmax ≤ 1, and separately Mpo/Mpomax + Myo/Myomax + Mro/Mromax ≤ 1. The catalog selection method uses E = 0.5 × (W/g) × (1.4 Va/1000)², with W in newtons, g = 9.81 m/s² and average speed Va in mm/s. Require E ≤ K × Emax and W ≤ K × β × Wmax. K is 1.0 for a top-mounted fixture and 0.6 for a front-mounted fixture; β is read from the speed-dependent load graph. Check actual offsets and all three moments, including stopping inertia. The catalog acceleration model is a = 1600(Va/1000)² with fixed cushioning or 400(Va/1000)² with hydraulic cushioning. For horizontal mounting, the catalog uses Mp = W(L1+A)/1000 and Mpo = Mp + Wa(L2+B)/(1000g). The transverse moment arm includes the guide offset C, giving C+L3. For vertical mounting, use the separate vertical formulas and add inertia to the static moment at the stroke end. The load/deflection graphs distinguish pitch, yaw and roll and the illustrated stroke; they do not promise zero deflection or one universal payload. The roll-deflection reference arm Lr for this bore is 89 mm. Mounting limits Parameter Details Tapped-hole body mounting M6 × 1.0; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 10 mm Vertical end mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 7 mm Front-face fixture mounting M6 × 1.0; maximum torque 7.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 10 mm Through-hole body mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 5.7 N·m; illustrated body thickness L 25 mm Top-face fixture mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 6 mm Keep screw penetration at least 0.5 mm below the maximum depth and within the actual detailed drawing. Mounting-table maxima do not override a shallower tapped hole shown in a particular view. Support the slide table while tightening fixture screws; holding only the body can transmit tightening torque into the guide and reduce accuracy. Maintain at least 3 mm separation from an adjacent magnetic cylinder to avoid sensor interference. Check all fixture clearances throughout travel. Use the selected symmetric or standard drawing for port access and stop placement. Begin flow adjustment slowly and remain within the energy, load and moment limits. Construction and materials The numbered entries follow the base-cylinder exploded drawing. Optional accessory assemblies are described separately above. Component Material 1 — Floating joint Low-carbon steel 2 — Bumper TPU 3 — Hex-socket screw Medium-carbon steel 4 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 5 — Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 6 — Rod seal NBR 7 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Bumper TPU 10 — Piston rod A Medium-carbon steel 11 — Piston rod B Stainless steel 12 — Body Aluminum alloy 13 — Magnet spacer Brass 14 — Magnet cushion NBR 15 — Magnet Sintered neodymium-iron-boron 16 — Piston seal NBR 17 — Piston Brass 18 — C retaining ring Spring steel 19 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 20 — Slide table Aluminum alloy 21 — Set screw Medium-carbon steel 22 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 23 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 24 — Crossed-roller guide assembly Assembly Series selection The standard strokes for the 16 mm bore are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100, 125 mm. Options are fixed cushioning, A/AS/AF adjustable stops and B/BS/BF hydraulic shock absorbers. The option suffix identifies the equipped end(s). M5 ports apply to bores 6–16 mm; PT, G or NPT 1/8 choices are listed for bores 20/25 mm. Other bores or strokes require a specifically defined order. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify H (CMSH / DMSH / EMSH)-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 16 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 0.5 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses M5 × 0.8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 Flow control / silencer example PTLM5 / BSLM5 Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm This slide uses a twin-piston drive. The general single-cylinder circuit example is only an initial reference; size the actual flow supply for the complete actuator and required cycle time. Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The HLS cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in a matching sensor groove on the HLS cylinder body. Detection uses the magnet included in this S configuration. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes Use PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder chamber port; use straight PC4M5 fittings at the M5 valve A/B ports and keep the chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. Seat the M5 sealing gaskets correctly. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each selected M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads The gray fittings/controllers accept soft nylon or PU tube at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended controller-cap rotation torque is 0.05 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Check insertion and wrench clearance. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 4 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSLM5 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (M5×0.8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 10/8 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 572 g; an estimate using the same bore/stroke base cylinder. The published body weight does not separately include the selected accessory or port-thread variant, so this is not an official measured weight of the full configured assembly. The catalog lists the symmetric layout with the corresponding standard family. Actual product weight governs; this is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $276.33

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac HLS series: crossed-roller slide-table cylinder - HLS8X10SA

  Specifications: HLS8X10SA is a double-acting precision slide-table cylinder with a 8 mm bore, 10 mm stroke and built-in magnet. Its crossed-roller guide supports accurate linear travel. This is the standard layout. Adjustable stroke stops at both ends. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 slide, clamp and stopper accessories (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning HLS Crossed-roller slide table; standard layout 8 8 mm bore X10 10 mm stroke S Built-in magnet A Adjustable stroke stops at both ends Technical specifications Parameter Details Action / working fluid Double acting / compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure — 2022 catalog 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Port M5 × 0.8 Standard cushioning Fixed rubber cushioning at both ends; selected stroke stops or shock absorbers as decoded above Guide / piston arrangement Crossed-roller guide with a twin-piston drive Applicable sensor family H profile: CMSH / DMSH / EMSH Edition note: the linked earlier English catalog specifies 0.2 MPa minimum operating pressure for this bore. The 2022 Chinese catalog specifies 0.15 MPa; the table above follows 2022. Use the requirements for the supplied edition when selecting the lower working pressure. Current-model dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the matching catalog drawing definitions; M and N in the body table are hole counts. Symmetric and standard layouts share table values but are not the same installation orientation. Parameter Details A 56 mm AB 48.5 mm AC 49 mm JB 20 mm JC 17 mm KB 25 mm LB 28 mm LC 9 mm M 4 holes N 2 holes PA 19.5 mm PB 12.5 mm R 23.5 mm Parameter Details height 24 mm front plate height 21.5 mm width 40 mm front plate thickness 6 mm front mounting 4–M3×0.5 depth4 top fixture screw M3×0.5 depth5 bottom screw M4×0.7 depth8 bottom counterbore Ø6.5 top transverse pitch 23 mm bottom transverse pitch 15 mm rear mounting 2–M4×0.7 depth6 rear local callouts 22.5 / 12 / 30 / 13 front local callouts 6.5 / 3.5 / 15 / 4 positioning hole Ø3 +0.03/0 depth3 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Selected stops and accessory dimensions The catalog accessory code for this configuration is F-HLS8A. A comprises AS + AF; B comprises BS + BF. Standard and symmetric rear-end accessories are not interchangeable; the forward BS assembly is shared between the HLQ and HLS families only where the selection table lists it. F-HLS8AS: Adjustable stroke stop at the forward end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 7 mm at this end. Parameter Details adjustment 5 mm A 8.5 mm B 21.5 mm C 14 mm D 21.5 mm E 11 mm F 4 mm M M8×1 P M3 length14 H 14.5 mm I 8 mm J 12 mm Q M3 length14 F-HLS8AF: Adjustable stroke stop at the retracting end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 7.5 mm at this end. Parameter Details adjustment 5 mm A 24 mm B 22.5 mm C 13 mm D 14 mm E 21.5 mm F 8.5 mm G 11 mm H 4 mm J M3 length8 K M8×1 Accessory-table letters describe the body-side and slide-side parts in the separate accessory drawing. Its 5 mm screw-adjustment entry, when present, is a component reference; use the installed-cylinder limits above for the assembled configuration. Load and moment selection Parameter Details Reference Wmax 8 N; this is load weight, not kilograms Base / adjustable-stop allowable-energy reference Emax 0.024 J Hydraulic-stop Emax at a fitted B/BS/BF end 0.048 J; the opposite fixed-cushion end retains the base value on a single-end option Mpo maximum 10.1 N·m Myo maximum 9.1 N·m Mro maximum 8.8 N·m Mp maximum 2.5 N·m My maximum 2.5 N·m Mr maximum 2 N·m Compensation A 32 mm Compensation B 8.5 mm Compensation C 20 mm Mpo/Myo/Mro apply at the end of travel; Mp/My/Mr apply during travel. Compensation distances A/B/C in this load table are separate from body-dimension callouts with the same letters. Check the combined ratios Mp/Mpmax + My/Mymax + Mr/Mrmax ≤ 1, and separately Mpo/Mpomax + Myo/Myomax + Mro/Mromax ≤ 1. The catalog selection method uses E = 0.5 × (W/g) × (1.4 Va/1000)², with W in newtons, g = 9.81 m/s² and average speed Va in mm/s. Require E ≤ K × Emax and W ≤ K × β × Wmax. K is 1.0 for a top-mounted fixture and 0.6 for a front-mounted fixture; β is read from the speed-dependent load graph. Check actual offsets and all three moments, including stopping inertia. The catalog acceleration model is a = 1600(Va/1000)² with fixed cushioning or 400(Va/1000)² with hydraulic cushioning. For horizontal mounting, the catalog uses Mp = W(L1+A)/1000 and Mpo = Mp + Wa(L2+B)/(1000g). The transverse moment arm includes the guide offset C, giving C+L3. For vertical mounting, use the separate vertical formulas and add inertia to the static moment at the stroke end. The load/deflection graphs distinguish pitch, yaw and roll and the illustrated stroke; they do not promise zero deflection or one universal payload. The roll-deflection reference arm Lr for this bore is 50 mm. Mounting limits Parameter Details Tapped-hole body mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 8 mm Vertical end mounting M3 × 0.5; maximum torque 0.5 N·m; maximum screw penetration 4 mm Front-face fixture mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 6 mm Through-hole body mounting M3 × 0.5; maximum torque 1.2 N·m; illustrated body thickness L 12.5 mm Top-face fixture mounting M3 × 0.5; maximum torque 0.9 N·m; maximum screw penetration 5 mm Keep screw penetration at least 0.5 mm below the maximum depth and within the actual detailed drawing. Mounting-table maxima do not override a shallower tapped hole shown in a particular view. Support the slide table while tightening fixture screws; holding only the body can transmit tightening torque into the guide and reduce accuracy. Maintain at least 3 mm separation from an adjacent magnetic cylinder to avoid sensor interference. Check all fixture clearances throughout travel. Use the selected symmetric or standard drawing for port access and stop placement. Begin flow adjustment slowly and remain within the energy, load and moment limits. Construction and materials The numbered entries follow the base-cylinder exploded drawing. Optional accessory assemblies are described separately above. Component Material 1 — Floating joint Low-carbon steel 2 — Bumper TPU 3 — Hex-socket screw Medium-carbon steel 4 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 5 — Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 6 — Rod seal NBR 7 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Bumper TPU 10 — Piston rod A Medium-carbon steel 11 — Piston rod B Stainless steel 12 — Body Aluminum alloy 13 — Magnet spacer Brass 14 — Magnet cushion NBR 15 — Magnet Sintered neodymium-iron-boron 16 — Piston seal NBR 17 — Piston Brass 18 — C retaining ring Spring steel 19 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 20 — Slide table Aluminum alloy 21 — Set screw Medium-carbon steel 22 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 23 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 24 — Crossed-roller guide assembly Assembly Series selection The standard strokes for the 8 mm bore are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75 mm. Options are fixed cushioning, A/AS/AF adjustable stops and B/BS/BF hydraulic shock absorbers. The option suffix identifies the equipped end(s). M5 ports apply to bores 6–16 mm; PT, G or NPT 1/8 choices are listed for bores 20/25 mm. Other bores or strokes require a specifically defined order. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify H (CMSH / DMSH / EMSH)-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. This slide uses a twin-piston drive. The general single-cylinder circuit example is only an initial reference; size the actual flow supply for the complete actuator and required cycle time. Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The HLS cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in a matching sensor groove on the HLS cylinder body. Detection uses the magnet included in this S configuration. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional M5 connections and flow control If a 4×2.5 mm tube circuit is selected, choose PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 chamber port and keep the two chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. Select the directional valve separately for actual flow, pressure and connections; no 500 mm/s circuit is established here. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODStraight connection at each selected M5 cylinder chamber port, if used instead of a controller PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length Seat the M5 sealing gaskets correctly. These gray fittings/controllers accept soft nylon or PU tube. With the earlier English-edition cylinder, use this selected branch at 0.2–0.7 MPa; a confirmed 2022-edition cylinder permits 0.15–0.7 MPa. The common temperature limit is −20 to +70°C, subject to any lower connected-component limit. The 0.05 N·m controller-cap rotation recommendation is not thread-tightening torque. Check insertion and wrench clearance. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 10/8 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 148 g; an estimate using the same bore/stroke base cylinder. The published body weight does not separately include the selected accessory or port-thread variant, so this is not an official measured weight of the full configured assembly. The catalog lists the symmetric layout with the corresponding standard family. Actual product weight governs; this is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $232.63

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac HLS series: crossed-roller slide-table cylinder - HLS16X75SA

  Specifications: HLS16X75SA is a double-acting precision slide-table cylinder with a 16 mm bore, 75 mm stroke and built-in magnet. Its crossed-roller guide supports accurate linear travel. This is the standard layout. Adjustable stroke stops at both ends. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 slide, clamp and stopper accessories (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning HLS Crossed-roller slide table; standard layout 16 16 mm bore X75 75 mm stroke S Built-in magnet A Adjustable stroke stops at both ends Technical specifications Parameter Details Action / working fluid Double acting / compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure — 2022 catalog 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Port M5 × 0.8 Standard cushioning Fixed rubber cushioning at both ends; selected stroke stops or shock absorbers as decoded above Guide / piston arrangement Crossed-roller guide with a twin-piston drive Applicable sensor family H profile: CMSH / DMSH / EMSH Current-model dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the matching catalog drawing definitions; M and N in the body table are hole counts. Symmetric and standard layouts share table values but are not the same installation orientation. Parameter Details A 162 mm AB 150 mm AC 151 mm JB 70 mm JC 61 mm KB 55 mm LB 35 mm LC 26 mm M 6 holes N 4 holes PA 90.5 mm PB 35 mm R 93.5 mm Parameter Details height 40 mm front plate height 36 mm width 60 mm front plate thickness 10 mm front mounting 4–M5×0.8 depth7 top fixture screw M5×0.8 depth6 bottom screw M6×1 depth12 bottom counterbore Ø9.5 top transverse pitch 35 mm bottom transverse pitch 26 mm rear mounting 2–M6×1 depth10 rear local callouts 37.5 / 20 / 48 / 16.5 front local callouts 12 / 6 / 26 / 4 positioning hole Ø5 +0.03/0 depth4 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Selected stops and accessory dimensions The catalog accessory code for this configuration is F-HLS16A. A comprises AS + AF; B comprises BS + BF. Standard and symmetric rear-end accessories are not interchangeable; the forward BS assembly is shared between the HLQ and HLS families only where the selection table lists it. F-HLS16AS: Adjustable stroke stop at the forward end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 6 mm at this end. Parameter Details adjustment 5 mm A 12 mm B 36 mm C 17.5 mm D 24 mm E 14 mm F 5 mm M M10×1 P M5 length16 H 23 mm I 10.5 mm J 17 mm Q M5 length16 F-HLS16AF: Adjustable stroke stop at the retracting end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 6.5 mm at this end. Parameter Details adjustment 5 mm A 37 mm B 37.5 mm C 23 mm D 18 mm E 24 mm F 12 mm G 14 mm H 5 mm J M5 length12 K M10×1 Accessory-table letters describe the body-side and slide-side parts in the separate accessory drawing. Its 5 mm screw-adjustment entry, when present, is a component reference; use the installed-cylinder limits above for the assembled configuration. Load and moment selection Parameter Details Reference Wmax 30 N; this is load weight, not kilograms Base / adjustable-stop allowable-energy reference Emax 0.1 J Hydraulic-stop Emax at a fitted B/BS/BF end 0.2 J; the opposite fixed-cushion end retains the base value on a single-end option Mpo maximum 78.8 N·m Myo maximum 71.9 N·m Mro maximum 48.6 N·m Mp maximum 17.6 N·m My maximum 17.6 N·m Mr maximum 8.9 N·m Compensation A 130 mm Compensation B 11 mm Compensation C 30 mm Mpo/Myo/Mro apply at the end of travel; Mp/My/Mr apply during travel. Compensation distances A/B/C in this load table are separate from body-dimension callouts with the same letters. Check the combined ratios Mp/Mpmax + My/Mymax + Mr/Mrmax ≤ 1, and separately Mpo/Mpomax + Myo/Myomax + Mro/Mromax ≤ 1. The catalog selection method uses E = 0.5 × (W/g) × (1.4 Va/1000)², with W in newtons, g = 9.81 m/s² and average speed Va in mm/s. Require E ≤ K × Emax and W ≤ K × β × Wmax. K is 1.0 for a top-mounted fixture and 0.6 for a front-mounted fixture; β is read from the speed-dependent load graph. Check actual offsets and all three moments, including stopping inertia. The catalog acceleration model is a = 1600(Va/1000)² with fixed cushioning or 400(Va/1000)² with hydraulic cushioning. For horizontal mounting, the catalog uses Mp = W(L1+A)/1000 and Mpo = Mp + Wa(L2+B)/(1000g). The transverse moment arm includes the guide offset C, giving C+L3. For vertical mounting, use the separate vertical formulas and add inertia to the static moment at the stroke end. The load/deflection graphs distinguish pitch, yaw and roll and the illustrated stroke; they do not promise zero deflection or one universal payload. The roll-deflection reference arm Lr for this bore is 89 mm. Mounting limits Parameter Details Tapped-hole body mounting M6 × 1.0; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 10 mm Vertical end mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 7 mm Front-face fixture mounting M6 × 1.0; maximum torque 7.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 10 mm Through-hole body mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 5.7 N·m; illustrated body thickness L 25 mm Top-face fixture mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 6 mm Keep screw penetration at least 0.5 mm below the maximum depth and within the actual detailed drawing. Mounting-table maxima do not override a shallower tapped hole shown in a particular view. Support the slide table while tightening fixture screws; holding only the body can transmit tightening torque into the guide and reduce accuracy. Maintain at least 3 mm separation from an adjacent magnetic cylinder to avoid sensor interference. Check all fixture clearances throughout travel. Use the selected symmetric or standard drawing for port access and stop placement. Begin flow adjustment slowly and remain within the energy, load and moment limits. Construction and materials The numbered entries follow the base-cylinder exploded drawing. Optional accessory assemblies are described separately above. Component Material 1 — Floating joint Low-carbon steel 2 — Bumper TPU 3 — Hex-socket screw Medium-carbon steel 4 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 5 — Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 6 — Rod seal NBR 7 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Bumper TPU 10 — Piston rod A Medium-carbon steel 11 — Piston rod B Stainless steel 12 — Body Aluminum alloy 13 — Magnet spacer Brass 14 — Magnet cushion NBR 15 — Magnet Sintered neodymium-iron-boron 16 — Piston seal NBR 17 — Piston Brass 18 — C retaining ring Spring steel 19 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 20 — Slide table Aluminum alloy 21 — Set screw Medium-carbon steel 22 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 23 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 24 — Crossed-roller guide assembly Assembly Series selection The standard strokes for the 16 mm bore are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100, 125 mm. Options are fixed cushioning, A/AS/AF adjustable stops and B/BS/BF hydraulic shock absorbers. The option suffix identifies the equipped end(s). M5 ports apply to bores 6–16 mm; PT, G or NPT 1/8 choices are listed for bores 20/25 mm. Other bores or strokes require a specifically defined order. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify H (CMSH / DMSH / EMSH)-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 16 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 0.5 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses M5 × 0.8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 Flow control / silencer example PTLM5 / BSLM5 Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm This slide uses a twin-piston drive. The general single-cylinder circuit example is only an initial reference; size the actual flow supply for the complete actuator and required cycle time. Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The HLS cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in a matching sensor groove on the HLS cylinder body. Detection uses the magnet included in this S configuration. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes Use PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder chamber port; use straight PC4M5 fittings at the M5 valve A/B ports and keep the chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. Seat the M5 sealing gaskets correctly. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each selected M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads The gray fittings/controllers accept soft nylon or PU tube at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended controller-cap rotation torque is 0.05 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Check insertion and wrench clearance. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 4 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSLM5 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (M5×0.8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 10/8 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 1012 g; an estimate using the same bore/stroke base cylinder. The published body weight does not separately include the selected accessory or port-thread variant, so this is not an official measured weight of the full configured assembly. The catalog lists the symmetric layout with the corresponding standard family. Actual product weight governs; this is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $392.20

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac HLS series: crossed-roller slide-table cylinder - HLS25X30SA

  Specifications: HLS25X30SA is a double-acting precision slide-table cylinder with a 25 mm bore, 30 mm stroke and built-in magnet. Its crossed-roller guide supports accurate linear travel. This is the standard layout. Adjustable stroke stops at both ends. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 slide, clamp and stopper accessories (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning HLS Crossed-roller slide table; standard layout 25 25 mm bore X30 30 mm stroke S Built-in magnet A Adjustable stroke stops at both ends Technical specifications Parameter Details Action / working fluid Double acting / compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure — 2022 catalog 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Port PT 1/8 Standard cushioning Fixed rubber cushioning at both ends; selected stroke stops or shock absorbers as decoded above Guide / piston arrangement Crossed-roller guide with a twin-piston drive Applicable sensor family H profile: CMSH / DMSH / EMSH Current-model dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the matching catalog drawing definitions; M and N in the body table are hole counts. Symmetric and standard layouts share table values but are not the same installation orientation. Parameter Details A 108 mm AB 90.5 mm AC 92 mm JB 45 mm JC 22 mm KB 50 mm LB 45 mm LC 22 mm M 4 holes N 2 holes S 40 mm PA 47 mm PB 12 mm R 55 mm Parameter Details height 62 mm front plate height 56.5 mm width 84 mm front plate thickness 15 mm front mounting 6–M6×1 depth10 top fixture screw M6×1 depth13 bottom screw M8×1.25 depth16 bottom counterbore Ø11 top transverse pitch 56 mm bottom transverse pitch 38 mm rear mounting 2–M8×1.25 depth15 rear local callouts 56.5 / 31 / 70 / 23 front local callouts 22 / 7 / 38 / 38 positioning hole Ø6 +0.03/0 depth6 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Selected stops and accessory dimensions The catalog accessory code for this configuration is F-HLS25A. A comprises AS + AF; B comprises BS + BF. Standard and symmetric rear-end accessories are not interchangeable; the forward BS assembly is shared between the HLQ and HLS families only where the selection table lists it. F-HLS25AS: Adjustable stroke stop at the forward end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 8.5 mm at this end. Parameter Details adjustment 5 mm A 16 mm B 53.5 mm C 24 mm D 32 mm E 19 mm F 6 mm M M14×1.5 P M8 length20 H 33 mm I 16.5 mm J 23 mm Q M8 length20 F-HLS25AF: Adjustable stroke stop at the retracting end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 8.5 mm at this end. Parameter Details adjustment 5 mm A 54 mm B 56 mm C 34 mm D 28 mm E 32 mm F 16 mm G 19 mm H 6 mm J M6 length18 K M14×1.5 Accessory-table letters describe the body-side and slide-side parts in the separate accessory drawing. Its 5 mm screw-adjustment entry, when present, is a component reference; use the installed-cylinder limits above for the assembled configuration. Load and moment selection Parameter Details Reference Wmax 70 N; this is load weight, not kilograms Base / adjustable-stop allowable-energy reference Emax 0.22 J Hydraulic-stop Emax at a fitted B/BS/BF end 0.44 J; the opposite fixed-cushion end retains the base value on a single-end option Mpo maximum 60.1 N·m Myo maximum 50.5 N·m Mro maximum 72.8 N·m Mp maximum 17.4 N·m My maximum 17.4 N·m Mr maximum 17.6 N·m Compensation A 72 mm Compensation B 20.3 mm Compensation C 42 mm Mpo/Myo/Mro apply at the end of travel; Mp/My/Mr apply during travel. Compensation distances A/B/C in this load table are separate from body-dimension callouts with the same letters. Check the combined ratios Mp/Mpmax + My/Mymax + Mr/Mrmax ≤ 1, and separately Mpo/Mpomax + Myo/Myomax + Mro/Mromax ≤ 1. The catalog selection method uses E = 0.5 × (W/g) × (1.4 Va/1000)², with W in newtons, g = 9.81 m/s² and average speed Va in mm/s. Require E ≤ K × Emax and W ≤ K × β × Wmax. K is 1.0 for a top-mounted fixture and 0.6 for a front-mounted fixture; β is read from the speed-dependent load graph. Check actual offsets and all three moments, including stopping inertia. The catalog acceleration model is a = 1600(Va/1000)² with fixed cushioning or 400(Va/1000)² with hydraulic cushioning. For horizontal mounting, the catalog uses Mp = W(L1+A)/1000 and Mpo = Mp + Wa(L2+B)/(1000g). The transverse moment arm includes the guide offset C, giving C+L3. For vertical mounting, use the separate vertical formulas and add inertia to the static moment at the stroke end. The load/deflection graphs distinguish pitch, yaw and roll and the illustrated stroke; they do not promise zero deflection or one universal payload. The roll-deflection reference arm Lr for this bore is 154 mm. Mounting limits Parameter Details Tapped-hole body mounting M8 × 1.25; maximum torque 18 N·m; maximum screw penetration 16 mm Vertical end mounting M6 × 1.0; maximum torque 7.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 10 mm Front-face fixture mounting M8 × 1.25; maximum torque 18 N·m; maximum screw penetration 15 mm Through-hole body mounting M6 × 1.0; maximum torque 10 N·m; illustrated body thickness L 36.2 mm Top-face fixture mounting M6 × 1.0; maximum torque 7.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 13 mm Keep screw penetration at least 0.5 mm below the maximum depth and within the actual detailed drawing. Mounting-table maxima do not override a shallower tapped hole shown in a particular view. Support the slide table while tightening fixture screws; holding only the body can transmit tightening torque into the guide and reduce accuracy. Maintain at least 3 mm separation from an adjacent magnetic cylinder to avoid sensor interference. Check all fixture clearances throughout travel. Use the selected symmetric or standard drawing for port access and stop placement. Begin flow adjustment slowly and remain within the energy, load and moment limits. Construction and materials The numbered entries follow the base-cylinder exploded drawing. Optional accessory assemblies are described separately above. Component Material 1 — Floating joint Low-carbon steel 2 — Bumper TPU 3 — Hex-socket screw Medium-carbon steel 4 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 5 — Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 6 — Rod seal NBR 7 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Bumper TPU 10 — Piston rod A Medium-carbon steel 11 — Piston rod B Stainless steel 12 — Body Aluminum alloy 13 — Magnet spacer Brass 14 — Magnet cushion NBR 15 — Magnet Sintered neodymium-iron-boron 16 — Piston seal NBR 17 — Piston Brass 18 — C retaining ring Spring steel 19 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 20 — Slide table Aluminum alloy 21 — Set screw Medium-carbon steel 22 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 23 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 24 — Crossed-roller guide assembly Assembly Series selection The standard strokes for the 25 mm bore are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150 mm. Options are fixed cushioning, A/AS/AF adjustable stops and B/BS/BF hydraulic shock absorbers. The option suffix identifies the equipped end(s). M5 ports apply to bores 6–16 mm; PT, G or NPT 1/8 choices are listed for bores 20/25 mm. Other bores or strokes require a specifically defined order. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify H (CMSH / DMSH / EMSH)-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 25 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 1.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT 1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 Flow control / silencer example PTLM5 / BSLM5 Tube outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm This slide uses a twin-piston drive. The general single-cylinder circuit example is only an initial reference; size the actual flow supply for the complete actuator and required cycle time. Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The HLS cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in a matching sensor groove on the HLS cylinder body. Detection uses the magnet included in this S configuration. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls Choose the listed straight fitting or A-type controller at each PT1/8 cylinder chamber port and the specified straight fittings at the separate valve A/B ports; keep both chamber lines separate. The A-type restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. PC601: PT1/8 male × 6 mm tube ODStraight connection at the cylinder port; no speed adjustment; also connects the separate 4A pilot ports if their lines use the same tube OD PTL601A: PT1/8 male × 6 mm tube OD; A-typeCylinder-port meter-out speed control instead of the straight fitting PC6M5: M5×0.8 male × 6 mm tube ODStraight connection at the selected valve A/B work ports US98A060040100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 6 mm OD × 4 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A060040100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 6 mm OD × 4 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: M5×0.8 female main ports; M5×0.8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: M5×0.8 female main ports; M5×0.8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: M5×0.8 female main ports; M5×0.8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: M5×0.8 female main ports; M5×0.8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: M5×0.8 female main ports; M5×0.8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction Fittings/controllers accept exact 6 mm OD soft nylon/PU tubing at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended cap-rotation torque is 0.08 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Seal tapered PT connections correctly. Seat the M5 valve-side gasket correctly. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 6 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSLM5 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (M5×0.8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 15/12 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 1500 g; an estimate using the same bore/stroke base cylinder. The published body weight does not separately include the selected accessory or port-thread variant, so this is not an official measured weight of the full configured assembly. The catalog lists the symmetric layout with the corresponding standard family. Actual product weight governs; this is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $398.64

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac HLS series: crossed-roller slide-table cylinder - HLS12X100S

  Specifications: HLS12X100S is a double-acting precision slide-table cylinder with a 12 mm bore, 100 mm stroke and built-in magnet. Its crossed-roller guide supports accurate linear travel. This is the standard layout. Fixed rubber cushioning; no optional stroke-stop assembly. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning HLS Crossed-roller slide table; standard layout 12 12 mm bore X100 100 mm stroke S Built-in magnet Technical specifications Parameter Details Action / working fluid Double acting / compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure — 2022 catalog 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Port M5 × 0.8 Standard cushioning Fixed rubber cushioning at both ends; selected stroke stops or shock absorbers as decoded above Guide / piston arrangement Crossed-roller guide with a twin-piston drive Applicable sensor family H profile: CMSH / DMSH / EMSH Edition note: the linked earlier English catalog specifies 0.15 MPa minimum operating pressure for this bore. The 2022 Chinese catalog specifies 0.15 MPa; the table above follows 2022. Use the requirements for the supplied edition when selecting the lower working pressure. Current-model dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the matching catalog drawing definitions; M and N in the body table are hole counts. Symmetric and standard layouts share table values but are not the same installation orientation. Parameter Details A 212 mm AB 202 mm AC 203 mm JB 76 mm JC 111 mm KB 65 mm LB 38 mm LC 35 mm M 6 holes N 5 holes PA 131.5 mm PB 50 mm R 115 mm Parameter Details height 32 mm front plate height 28 mm width 50 mm front plate thickness 8 mm front mounting 4–M4×0.7 depth6 top fixture screw M4×0.7 depth5.5 bottom screw M5×0.8 depth10 bottom counterbore Ø8 top transverse pitch 28 mm bottom transverse pitch 20 mm rear mounting 2–M5×0.8 depth8 rear local callouts 30 / 16 / 38 / 14.5 front local callouts 9 / 5 / 20 positioning hole Ø4 +0.03/0 depth3.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Selected stops and accessory dimensions No optional A/AS/AF/B/BS/BF assembly is selected in this model. The fixed cushioning remains part of the base cylinder. Load and moment selection Parameter Details Reference Wmax 15 N; this is load weight, not kilograms Base / adjustable-stop allowable-energy reference Emax 0.05 J Hydraulic-stop Emax at a fitted B/BS/BF end 0.1 J; the opposite fixed-cushion end retains the base value on a single-end option Mpo maximum 78.8 N·m Myo maximum 71.9 N·m Mro maximum 48.6 N·m Mp maximum 14.7 N·m My maximum 14.7 N·m Mr maximum 6.8 N·m Compensation A 160 mm Compensation B 10 mm Compensation C 25 mm Mpo/Myo/Mro apply at the end of travel; Mp/My/Mr apply during travel. Compensation distances A/B/C in this load table are separate from body-dimension callouts with the same letters. Check the combined ratios Mp/Mpmax + My/Mymax + Mr/Mrmax ≤ 1, and separately Mpo/Mpomax + Myo/Myomax + Mro/Mromax ≤ 1. The catalog selection method uses E = 0.5 × (W/g) × (1.4 Va/1000)², with W in newtons, g = 9.81 m/s² and average speed Va in mm/s. Require E ≤ K × Emax and W ≤ K × β × Wmax. K is 1.0 for a top-mounted fixture and 0.6 for a front-mounted fixture; β is read from the speed-dependent load graph. Check actual offsets and all three moments, including stopping inertia. The catalog acceleration model is a = 1600(Va/1000)² with fixed cushioning or 400(Va/1000)² with hydraulic cushioning. For horizontal mounting, the catalog uses Mp = W(L1+A)/1000 and Mpo = Mp + Wa(L2+B)/(1000g). The transverse moment arm includes the guide offset C, giving C+L3. For vertical mounting, use the separate vertical formulas and add inertia to the static moment at the stroke end. The load/deflection graphs distinguish pitch, yaw and roll and the illustrated stroke; they do not promise zero deflection or one universal payload. The roll-deflection reference arm Lr for this bore is 65 mm. Mounting limits Parameter Details Tapped-hole body mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 10 mm Vertical end mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 6 mm Front-face fixture mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 8 mm Through-hole body mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.8 N·m; illustrated body thickness L 18 mm Top-face fixture mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 5.5 mm Keep screw penetration at least 0.5 mm below the maximum depth and within the actual detailed drawing. Mounting-table maxima do not override a shallower tapped hole shown in a particular view. Support the slide table while tightening fixture screws; holding only the body can transmit tightening torque into the guide and reduce accuracy. Maintain at least 3 mm separation from an adjacent magnetic cylinder to avoid sensor interference. Check all fixture clearances throughout travel. Use the selected symmetric or standard drawing for port access and stop placement. Begin flow adjustment slowly and remain within the energy, load and moment limits. Construction and materials The numbered entries follow the base-cylinder exploded drawing. Optional accessory assemblies are described separately above. Component Material 1 — Floating joint Low-carbon steel 2 — Bumper TPU 3 — Hex-socket screw Medium-carbon steel 4 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 5 — Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 6 — Rod seal NBR 7 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Bumper TPU 10 — Piston rod A Medium-carbon steel 11 — Piston rod B Stainless steel 12 — Body Aluminum alloy 13 — Magnet spacer Brass 14 — Magnet cushion NBR 15 — Magnet Sintered neodymium-iron-boron 16 — Piston seal NBR 17 — Piston Brass 18 — C retaining ring Spring steel 19 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 20 — Slide table Aluminum alloy 21 — Set screw Medium-carbon steel 22 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 23 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 24 — Crossed-roller guide assembly Assembly Series selection The standard strokes for the 12 mm bore are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100 mm. Options are fixed cushioning, A/AS/AF adjustable stops and B/BS/BF hydraulic shock absorbers. The option suffix identifies the equipped end(s). M5 ports apply to bores 6–16 mm; PT, G or NPT 1/8 choices are listed for bores 20/25 mm. Other bores or strokes require a specifically defined order. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify H (CMSH / DMSH / EMSH)-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 12 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 0.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses M5 × 0.8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 Flow control / silencer example PTLM5 / BSLM5 Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm This slide uses a twin-piston drive. The general single-cylinder circuit example is only an initial reference; size the actual flow supply for the complete actuator and required cycle time. Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The HLS cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in a matching sensor groove on the HLS cylinder body. Detection uses the magnet included in this S configuration. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes Use PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder chamber port; use straight PC4M5 fittings at the M5 valve A/B ports and keep the chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. Seat the M5 sealing gaskets correctly. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each selected M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads The gray fittings/controllers accept soft nylon or PU tube at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended controller-cap rotation torque is 0.05 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Check insertion and wrench clearance. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 4 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSLM5 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (M5×0.8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 10/8 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 878 g, from the 2022 base-cylinder weight-reference table. The catalog lists the symmetric layout with the corresponding standard family. Actual product weight governs; this is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $385.76

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac HLS series: crossed-roller slide-table cylinder - HLS12X100SA

  Specifications: HLS12X100SA is a double-acting precision slide-table cylinder with a 12 mm bore, 100 mm stroke and built-in magnet. Its crossed-roller guide supports accurate linear travel. This is the standard layout. Adjustable stroke stops at both ends. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 slide, clamp and stopper accessories (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning HLS Crossed-roller slide table; standard layout 12 12 mm bore X100 100 mm stroke S Built-in magnet A Adjustable stroke stops at both ends Technical specifications Parameter Details Action / working fluid Double acting / compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure — 2022 catalog 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Port M5 × 0.8 Standard cushioning Fixed rubber cushioning at both ends; selected stroke stops or shock absorbers as decoded above Guide / piston arrangement Crossed-roller guide with a twin-piston drive Applicable sensor family H profile: CMSH / DMSH / EMSH Edition note: the linked earlier English catalog specifies 0.15 MPa minimum operating pressure for this bore. The 2022 Chinese catalog specifies 0.15 MPa; the table above follows 2022. Use the requirements for the supplied edition when selecting the lower working pressure. Current-model dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the matching catalog drawing definitions; M and N in the body table are hole counts. Symmetric and standard layouts share table values but are not the same installation orientation. Parameter Details A 212 mm AB 202 mm AC 203 mm JB 76 mm JC 111 mm KB 65 mm LB 38 mm LC 35 mm M 6 holes N 5 holes PA 131.5 mm PB 50 mm R 115 mm Parameter Details height 32 mm front plate height 28 mm width 50 mm front plate thickness 8 mm front mounting 4–M4×0.7 depth6 top fixture screw M4×0.7 depth5.5 bottom screw M5×0.8 depth10 bottom counterbore Ø8 top transverse pitch 28 mm bottom transverse pitch 20 mm rear mounting 2–M5×0.8 depth8 rear local callouts 30 / 16 / 38 / 14.5 front local callouts 9 / 5 / 20 positioning hole Ø4 +0.03/0 depth3.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Selected stops and accessory dimensions The catalog accessory code for this configuration is F-HLS12A. A comprises AS + AF; B comprises BS + BF. Standard and symmetric rear-end accessories are not interchangeable; the forward BS assembly is shared between the HLQ and HLS families only where the selection table lists it. F-HLS12AS: Adjustable stroke stop at the forward end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 6 mm at this end. Parameter Details adjustment 5 mm A 11 mm B 29 mm C 15.5 mm D 21.5 mm E 11 mm F 4 mm M M8×1 P M4 length16 H 20 mm I 9 mm J 13.5 mm Q M4 length12 F-HLS12AF: Adjustable stroke stop at the retracting end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 5 mm at this end. Parameter Details adjustment 5 mm A 31 mm B 29 mm C 18 mm D 16 mm E 21.5 mm F 11 mm G 11 mm H 4 mm J M4 length12 K M8×1 Accessory-table letters describe the body-side and slide-side parts in the separate accessory drawing. Its 5 mm screw-adjustment entry, when present, is a component reference; use the installed-cylinder limits above for the assembled configuration. Load and moment selection Parameter Details Reference Wmax 15 N; this is load weight, not kilograms Base / adjustable-stop allowable-energy reference Emax 0.05 J Hydraulic-stop Emax at a fitted B/BS/BF end 0.1 J; the opposite fixed-cushion end retains the base value on a single-end option Mpo maximum 78.8 N·m Myo maximum 71.9 N·m Mro maximum 48.6 N·m Mp maximum 14.7 N·m My maximum 14.7 N·m Mr maximum 6.8 N·m Compensation A 160 mm Compensation B 10 mm Compensation C 25 mm Mpo/Myo/Mro apply at the end of travel; Mp/My/Mr apply during travel. Compensation distances A/B/C in this load table are separate from body-dimension callouts with the same letters. Check the combined ratios Mp/Mpmax + My/Mymax + Mr/Mrmax ≤ 1, and separately Mpo/Mpomax + Myo/Myomax + Mro/Mromax ≤ 1. The catalog selection method uses E = 0.5 × (W/g) × (1.4 Va/1000)², with W in newtons, g = 9.81 m/s² and average speed Va in mm/s. Require E ≤ K × Emax and W ≤ K × β × Wmax. K is 1.0 for a top-mounted fixture and 0.6 for a front-mounted fixture; β is read from the speed-dependent load graph. Check actual offsets and all three moments, including stopping inertia. The catalog acceleration model is a = 1600(Va/1000)² with fixed cushioning or 400(Va/1000)² with hydraulic cushioning. For horizontal mounting, the catalog uses Mp = W(L1+A)/1000 and Mpo = Mp + Wa(L2+B)/(1000g). The transverse moment arm includes the guide offset C, giving C+L3. For vertical mounting, use the separate vertical formulas and add inertia to the static moment at the stroke end. The load/deflection graphs distinguish pitch, yaw and roll and the illustrated stroke; they do not promise zero deflection or one universal payload. The roll-deflection reference arm Lr for this bore is 65 mm. Mounting limits Parameter Details Tapped-hole body mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 10 mm Vertical end mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 6 mm Front-face fixture mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 8 mm Through-hole body mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.8 N·m; illustrated body thickness L 18 mm Top-face fixture mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 5.5 mm Keep screw penetration at least 0.5 mm below the maximum depth and within the actual detailed drawing. Mounting-table maxima do not override a shallower tapped hole shown in a particular view. Support the slide table while tightening fixture screws; holding only the body can transmit tightening torque into the guide and reduce accuracy. Maintain at least 3 mm separation from an adjacent magnetic cylinder to avoid sensor interference. Check all fixture clearances throughout travel. Use the selected symmetric or standard drawing for port access and stop placement. Begin flow adjustment slowly and remain within the energy, load and moment limits. Construction and materials The numbered entries follow the base-cylinder exploded drawing. Optional accessory assemblies are described separately above. Component Material 1 — Floating joint Low-carbon steel 2 — Bumper TPU 3 — Hex-socket screw Medium-carbon steel 4 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 5 — Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 6 — Rod seal NBR 7 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Bumper TPU 10 — Piston rod A Medium-carbon steel 11 — Piston rod B Stainless steel 12 — Body Aluminum alloy 13 — Magnet spacer Brass 14 — Magnet cushion NBR 15 — Magnet Sintered neodymium-iron-boron 16 — Piston seal NBR 17 — Piston Brass 18 — C retaining ring Spring steel 19 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 20 — Slide table Aluminum alloy 21 — Set screw Medium-carbon steel 22 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 23 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 24 — Crossed-roller guide assembly Assembly Series selection The standard strokes for the 12 mm bore are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100 mm. Options are fixed cushioning, A/AS/AF adjustable stops and B/BS/BF hydraulic shock absorbers. The option suffix identifies the equipped end(s). M5 ports apply to bores 6–16 mm; PT, G or NPT 1/8 choices are listed for bores 20/25 mm. Other bores or strokes require a specifically defined order. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify H (CMSH / DMSH / EMSH)-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 12 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 0.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses M5 × 0.8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 Flow control / silencer example PTLM5 / BSLM5 Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm This slide uses a twin-piston drive. The general single-cylinder circuit example is only an initial reference; size the actual flow supply for the complete actuator and required cycle time. Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The HLS cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in a matching sensor groove on the HLS cylinder body. Detection uses the magnet included in this S configuration. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes Use PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder chamber port; use straight PC4M5 fittings at the M5 valve A/B ports and keep the chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. Seat the M5 sealing gaskets correctly. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each selected M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads The gray fittings/controllers accept soft nylon or PU tube at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended controller-cap rotation torque is 0.05 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Check insertion and wrench clearance. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 4 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSLM5 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (M5×0.8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 10/8 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 878 g; an estimate using the same bore/stroke base cylinder. The published body weight does not separately include the selected accessory or port-thread variant, so this is not an official measured weight of the full configured assembly. The catalog lists the symmetric layout with the corresponding standard family. Actual product weight governs; this is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $418.10

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac HLS series: crossed-roller slide-table cylinder - HLS12X100SAF

  Specifications: HLS12X100SAF is a double-acting precision slide-table cylinder with a 12 mm bore, 100 mm stroke and built-in magnet. Its crossed-roller guide supports accurate linear travel. This is the standard layout. Adjustable stroke stop at the retracting end. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 slide, clamp and stopper accessories (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning HLS Crossed-roller slide table; standard layout 12 12 mm bore X100 100 mm stroke S Built-in magnet AF Adjustable stroke stop at the retracting end Technical specifications Parameter Details Action / working fluid Double acting / compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure — 2022 catalog 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Port M5 × 0.8 Standard cushioning Fixed rubber cushioning at both ends; selected stroke stops or shock absorbers as decoded above Guide / piston arrangement Crossed-roller guide with a twin-piston drive Applicable sensor family H profile: CMSH / DMSH / EMSH Edition note: the linked earlier English catalog specifies 0.15 MPa minimum operating pressure for this bore. The 2022 Chinese catalog specifies 0.15 MPa; the table above follows 2022. Use the requirements for the supplied edition when selecting the lower working pressure. Current-model dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the matching catalog drawing definitions; M and N in the body table are hole counts. Symmetric and standard layouts share table values but are not the same installation orientation. Parameter Details A 212 mm AB 202 mm AC 203 mm JB 76 mm JC 111 mm KB 65 mm LB 38 mm LC 35 mm M 6 holes N 5 holes PA 131.5 mm PB 50 mm R 115 mm Parameter Details height 32 mm front plate height 28 mm width 50 mm front plate thickness 8 mm front mounting 4–M4×0.7 depth6 top fixture screw M4×0.7 depth5.5 bottom screw M5×0.8 depth10 bottom counterbore Ø8 top transverse pitch 28 mm bottom transverse pitch 20 mm rear mounting 2–M5×0.8 depth8 rear local callouts 30 / 16 / 38 / 14.5 front local callouts 9 / 5 / 20 positioning hole Ø4 +0.03/0 depth3.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Selected stops and accessory dimensions The catalog accessory code for this configuration is F-HLS12AF. A comprises AS + AF; B comprises BS + BF. Standard and symmetric rear-end accessories are not interchangeable; the forward BS assembly is shared between the HLQ and HLS families only where the selection table lists it. F-HLS12AF: Adjustable stroke stop at the retracting end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 5 mm at this end. Parameter Details adjustment 5 mm A 31 mm B 29 mm C 18 mm D 16 mm E 21.5 mm F 11 mm G 11 mm H 4 mm J M4 length12 K M8×1 Accessory-table letters describe the body-side and slide-side parts in the separate accessory drawing. Its 5 mm screw-adjustment entry, when present, is a component reference; use the installed-cylinder limits above for the assembled configuration. Load and moment selection Parameter Details Reference Wmax 15 N; this is load weight, not kilograms Base / adjustable-stop allowable-energy reference Emax 0.05 J Hydraulic-stop Emax at a fitted B/BS/BF end 0.1 J; the opposite fixed-cushion end retains the base value on a single-end option Mpo maximum 78.8 N·m Myo maximum 71.9 N·m Mro maximum 48.6 N·m Mp maximum 14.7 N·m My maximum 14.7 N·m Mr maximum 6.8 N·m Compensation A 160 mm Compensation B 10 mm Compensation C 25 mm Mpo/Myo/Mro apply at the end of travel; Mp/My/Mr apply during travel. Compensation distances A/B/C in this load table are separate from body-dimension callouts with the same letters. Check the combined ratios Mp/Mpmax + My/Mymax + Mr/Mrmax ≤ 1, and separately Mpo/Mpomax + Myo/Myomax + Mro/Mromax ≤ 1. The catalog selection method uses E = 0.5 × (W/g) × (1.4 Va/1000)², with W in newtons, g = 9.81 m/s² and average speed Va in mm/s. Require E ≤ K × Emax and W ≤ K × β × Wmax. K is 1.0 for a top-mounted fixture and 0.6 for a front-mounted fixture; β is read from the speed-dependent load graph. Check actual offsets and all three moments, including stopping inertia. The catalog acceleration model is a = 1600(Va/1000)² with fixed cushioning or 400(Va/1000)² with hydraulic cushioning. For horizontal mounting, the catalog uses Mp = W(L1+A)/1000 and Mpo = Mp + Wa(L2+B)/(1000g). The transverse moment arm includes the guide offset C, giving C+L3. For vertical mounting, use the separate vertical formulas and add inertia to the static moment at the stroke end. The load/deflection graphs distinguish pitch, yaw and roll and the illustrated stroke; they do not promise zero deflection or one universal payload. The roll-deflection reference arm Lr for this bore is 65 mm. Mounting limits Parameter Details Tapped-hole body mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 10 mm Vertical end mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 6 mm Front-face fixture mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 8 mm Through-hole body mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.8 N·m; illustrated body thickness L 18 mm Top-face fixture mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 5.5 mm Keep screw penetration at least 0.5 mm below the maximum depth and within the actual detailed drawing. Mounting-table maxima do not override a shallower tapped hole shown in a particular view. Support the slide table while tightening fixture screws; holding only the body can transmit tightening torque into the guide and reduce accuracy. Maintain at least 3 mm separation from an adjacent magnetic cylinder to avoid sensor interference. Check all fixture clearances throughout travel. Use the selected symmetric or standard drawing for port access and stop placement. Begin flow adjustment slowly and remain within the energy, load and moment limits. Construction and materials The numbered entries follow the base-cylinder exploded drawing. Optional accessory assemblies are described separately above. Component Material 1 — Floating joint Low-carbon steel 2 — Bumper TPU 3 — Hex-socket screw Medium-carbon steel 4 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 5 — Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 6 — Rod seal NBR 7 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Bumper TPU 10 — Piston rod A Medium-carbon steel 11 — Piston rod B Stainless steel 12 — Body Aluminum alloy 13 — Magnet spacer Brass 14 — Magnet cushion NBR 15 — Magnet Sintered neodymium-iron-boron 16 — Piston seal NBR 17 — Piston Brass 18 — C retaining ring Spring steel 19 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 20 — Slide table Aluminum alloy 21 — Set screw Medium-carbon steel 22 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 23 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 24 — Crossed-roller guide assembly Assembly Series selection The standard strokes for the 12 mm bore are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100 mm. Options are fixed cushioning, A/AS/AF adjustable stops and B/BS/BF hydraulic shock absorbers. The option suffix identifies the equipped end(s). M5 ports apply to bores 6–16 mm; PT, G or NPT 1/8 choices are listed for bores 20/25 mm. Other bores or strokes require a specifically defined order. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify H (CMSH / DMSH / EMSH)-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 12 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 0.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses M5 × 0.8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 Flow control / silencer example PTLM5 / BSLM5 Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm This slide uses a twin-piston drive. The general single-cylinder circuit example is only an initial reference; size the actual flow supply for the complete actuator and required cycle time. Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The HLS cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in a matching sensor groove on the HLS cylinder body. Detection uses the magnet included in this S configuration. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes Use PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder chamber port; use straight PC4M5 fittings at the M5 valve A/B ports and keep the chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. Seat the M5 sealing gaskets correctly. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each selected M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads The gray fittings/controllers accept soft nylon or PU tube at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended controller-cap rotation torque is 0.05 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Check insertion and wrench clearance. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 4 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSLM5 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (M5×0.8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 10/8 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 878 g; an estimate using the same bore/stroke base cylinder. The published body weight does not separately include the selected accessory or port-thread variant, so this is not an official measured weight of the full configured assembly. The catalog lists the symmetric layout with the corresponding standard family. Actual product weight governs; this is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $399.33

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac HLS series: crossed-roller slide-table cylinder - HLS12X100SAS

  Specifications: HLS12X100SAS is a double-acting precision slide-table cylinder with a 12 mm bore, 100 mm stroke and built-in magnet. Its crossed-roller guide supports accurate linear travel. This is the standard layout. Adjustable stroke stop at the forward end. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 slide, clamp and stopper accessories (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning HLS Crossed-roller slide table; standard layout 12 12 mm bore X100 100 mm stroke S Built-in magnet AS Adjustable stroke stop at the forward end Technical specifications Parameter Details Action / working fluid Double acting / compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure — 2022 catalog 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Port M5 × 0.8 Standard cushioning Fixed rubber cushioning at both ends; selected stroke stops or shock absorbers as decoded above Guide / piston arrangement Crossed-roller guide with a twin-piston drive Applicable sensor family H profile: CMSH / DMSH / EMSH Edition note: the linked earlier English catalog specifies 0.15 MPa minimum operating pressure for this bore. The 2022 Chinese catalog specifies 0.15 MPa; the table above follows 2022. Use the requirements for the supplied edition when selecting the lower working pressure. Current-model dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the matching catalog drawing definitions; M and N in the body table are hole counts. Symmetric and standard layouts share table values but are not the same installation orientation. Parameter Details A 212 mm AB 202 mm AC 203 mm JB 76 mm JC 111 mm KB 65 mm LB 38 mm LC 35 mm M 6 holes N 5 holes PA 131.5 mm PB 50 mm R 115 mm Parameter Details height 32 mm front plate height 28 mm width 50 mm front plate thickness 8 mm front mounting 4–M4×0.7 depth6 top fixture screw M4×0.7 depth5.5 bottom screw M5×0.8 depth10 bottom counterbore Ø8 top transverse pitch 28 mm bottom transverse pitch 20 mm rear mounting 2–M5×0.8 depth8 rear local callouts 30 / 16 / 38 / 14.5 front local callouts 9 / 5 / 20 positioning hole Ø4 +0.03/0 depth3.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Selected stops and accessory dimensions The catalog accessory code for this configuration is F-HLS12AS. A comprises AS + AF; B comprises BS + BF. Standard and symmetric rear-end accessories are not interchangeable; the forward BS assembly is shared between the HLQ and HLS families only where the selection table lists it. F-HLS12AS: Adjustable stroke stop at the forward end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 6 mm at this end. Parameter Details adjustment 5 mm A 11 mm B 29 mm C 15.5 mm D 21.5 mm E 11 mm F 4 mm M M8×1 P M4 length16 H 20 mm I 9 mm J 13.5 mm Q M4 length12 Accessory-table letters describe the body-side and slide-side parts in the separate accessory drawing. Its 5 mm screw-adjustment entry, when present, is a component reference; use the installed-cylinder limits above for the assembled configuration. Load and moment selection Parameter Details Reference Wmax 15 N; this is load weight, not kilograms Base / adjustable-stop allowable-energy reference Emax 0.05 J Hydraulic-stop Emax at a fitted B/BS/BF end 0.1 J; the opposite fixed-cushion end retains the base value on a single-end option Mpo maximum 78.8 N·m Myo maximum 71.9 N·m Mro maximum 48.6 N·m Mp maximum 14.7 N·m My maximum 14.7 N·m Mr maximum 6.8 N·m Compensation A 160 mm Compensation B 10 mm Compensation C 25 mm Mpo/Myo/Mro apply at the end of travel; Mp/My/Mr apply during travel. Compensation distances A/B/C in this load table are separate from body-dimension callouts with the same letters. Check the combined ratios Mp/Mpmax + My/Mymax + Mr/Mrmax ≤ 1, and separately Mpo/Mpomax + Myo/Myomax + Mro/Mromax ≤ 1. The catalog selection method uses E = 0.5 × (W/g) × (1.4 Va/1000)², with W in newtons, g = 9.81 m/s² and average speed Va in mm/s. Require E ≤ K × Emax and W ≤ K × β × Wmax. K is 1.0 for a top-mounted fixture and 0.6 for a front-mounted fixture; β is read from the speed-dependent load graph. Check actual offsets and all three moments, including stopping inertia. The catalog acceleration model is a = 1600(Va/1000)² with fixed cushioning or 400(Va/1000)² with hydraulic cushioning. For horizontal mounting, the catalog uses Mp = W(L1+A)/1000 and Mpo = Mp + Wa(L2+B)/(1000g). The transverse moment arm includes the guide offset C, giving C+L3. For vertical mounting, use the separate vertical formulas and add inertia to the static moment at the stroke end. The load/deflection graphs distinguish pitch, yaw and roll and the illustrated stroke; they do not promise zero deflection or one universal payload. The roll-deflection reference arm Lr for this bore is 65 mm. Mounting limits Parameter Details Tapped-hole body mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 10 mm Vertical end mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 6 mm Front-face fixture mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 8 mm Through-hole body mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.8 N·m; illustrated body thickness L 18 mm Top-face fixture mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 5.5 mm Keep screw penetration at least 0.5 mm below the maximum depth and within the actual detailed drawing. Mounting-table maxima do not override a shallower tapped hole shown in a particular view. Support the slide table while tightening fixture screws; holding only the body can transmit tightening torque into the guide and reduce accuracy. Maintain at least 3 mm separation from an adjacent magnetic cylinder to avoid sensor interference. Check all fixture clearances throughout travel. Use the selected symmetric or standard drawing for port access and stop placement. Begin flow adjustment slowly and remain within the energy, load and moment limits. Construction and materials The numbered entries follow the base-cylinder exploded drawing. Optional accessory assemblies are described separately above. Component Material 1 — Floating joint Low-carbon steel 2 — Bumper TPU 3 — Hex-socket screw Medium-carbon steel 4 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 5 — Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 6 — Rod seal NBR 7 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Bumper TPU 10 — Piston rod A Medium-carbon steel 11 — Piston rod B Stainless steel 12 — Body Aluminum alloy 13 — Magnet spacer Brass 14 — Magnet cushion NBR 15 — Magnet Sintered neodymium-iron-boron 16 — Piston seal NBR 17 — Piston Brass 18 — C retaining ring Spring steel 19 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 20 — Slide table Aluminum alloy 21 — Set screw Medium-carbon steel 22 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 23 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 24 — Crossed-roller guide assembly Assembly Series selection The standard strokes for the 12 mm bore are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100 mm. Options are fixed cushioning, A/AS/AF adjustable stops and B/BS/BF hydraulic shock absorbers. The option suffix identifies the equipped end(s). M5 ports apply to bores 6–16 mm; PT, G or NPT 1/8 choices are listed for bores 20/25 mm. Other bores or strokes require a specifically defined order. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify H (CMSH / DMSH / EMSH)-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 12 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 0.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses M5 × 0.8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 Flow control / silencer example PTLM5 / BSLM5 Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm This slide uses a twin-piston drive. The general single-cylinder circuit example is only an initial reference; size the actual flow supply for the complete actuator and required cycle time. Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The HLS cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in a matching sensor groove on the HLS cylinder body. Detection uses the magnet included in this S configuration. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes Use PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder chamber port; use straight PC4M5 fittings at the M5 valve A/B ports and keep the chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. Seat the M5 sealing gaskets correctly. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each selected M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads The gray fittings/controllers accept soft nylon or PU tube at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended controller-cap rotation torque is 0.05 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Check insertion and wrench clearance. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 4 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSLM5 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (M5×0.8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 10/8 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 878 g; an estimate using the same bore/stroke base cylinder. The published body weight does not separately include the selected accessory or port-thread variant, so this is not an official measured weight of the full configured assembly. The catalog lists the symmetric layout with the corresponding standard family. Actual product weight governs; this is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $406.31

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac HLS series: crossed-roller slide-table cylinder - HLS12X100SB

  Specifications: HLS12X100SB is a double-acting precision slide-table cylinder with a 12 mm bore, 100 mm stroke and built-in magnet. Its crossed-roller guide supports accurate linear travel. This is the standard layout. Hydraulic shock absorbers at both ends. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 slide, clamp and stopper accessories (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning HLS Crossed-roller slide table; standard layout 12 12 mm bore X100 100 mm stroke S Built-in magnet B Hydraulic shock absorbers at both ends Technical specifications Parameter Details Action / working fluid Double acting / compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure — 2022 catalog 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Port M5 × 0.8 Standard cushioning Fixed rubber cushioning at both ends; selected stroke stops or shock absorbers as decoded above Guide / piston arrangement Crossed-roller guide with a twin-piston drive Applicable sensor family H profile: CMSH / DMSH / EMSH Edition note: the linked earlier English catalog specifies 0.15 MPa minimum operating pressure for this bore. The 2022 Chinese catalog specifies 0.15 MPa; the table above follows 2022. Use the requirements for the supplied edition when selecting the lower working pressure. Current-model dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the matching catalog drawing definitions; M and N in the body table are hole counts. Symmetric and standard layouts share table values but are not the same installation orientation. Parameter Details A 212 mm AB 202 mm AC 203 mm JB 76 mm JC 111 mm KB 65 mm LB 38 mm LC 35 mm M 6 holes N 5 holes PA 131.5 mm PB 50 mm R 115 mm Parameter Details height 32 mm front plate height 28 mm width 50 mm front plate thickness 8 mm front mounting 4–M4×0.7 depth6 top fixture screw M4×0.7 depth5.5 bottom screw M5×0.8 depth10 bottom counterbore Ø8 top transverse pitch 28 mm bottom transverse pitch 20 mm rear mounting 2–M5×0.8 depth8 rear local callouts 30 / 16 / 38 / 14.5 front local callouts 9 / 5 / 20 positioning hole Ø4 +0.03/0 depth3.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Selected stops and accessory dimensions The catalog accessory code for this configuration is F-HLS12B. A comprises AS + AF; B comprises BS + BF. Standard and symmetric rear-end accessories are not interchangeable; the forward BS assembly is shared between the HLQ and HLS families only where the selection table lists it. F-HLQ12BS: Hydraulic shock absorber at the forward end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 17.5 mm at this end. Parameter Details A 11 mm B 29 mm C 14 mm D 15.5 mm E 40 mm E1 6 mm F 11 mm G 7 mm M M8×1 P M4 length16 H 20 mm I 9 mm J 13.5 mm Q M4 length12 F-HLS12BF: Hydraulic shock absorber at the retracting end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 17 mm at this end. Parameter Details A 31 mm B 29 mm C 18 mm D 16 mm E 40 mm E1 6 mm F 11 mm G 11 mm H 7 mm J M8×1 P M4 length12 Accessory-table letters describe the body-side and slide-side parts in the separate accessory drawing. Its 5 mm screw-adjustment entry, when present, is a component reference; use the installed-cylinder limits above for the assembled configuration. Parameter Details Specified shock absorber ACA0806-1N Maximum shock-absorber retaining-nut torque 1.67 N·m Do not adjust or remove the set screw at the back of the shock absorber: this can release oil and disable damping. A single-end BS or BF option provides hydraulic damping only at that specified end. Load and moment selection Parameter Details Reference Wmax 15 N; this is load weight, not kilograms Base / adjustable-stop allowable-energy reference Emax 0.05 J Hydraulic-stop Emax at a fitted B/BS/BF end 0.1 J; the opposite fixed-cushion end retains the base value on a single-end option Mpo maximum 78.8 N·m Myo maximum 71.9 N·m Mro maximum 48.6 N·m Mp maximum 14.7 N·m My maximum 14.7 N·m Mr maximum 6.8 N·m Compensation A 160 mm Compensation B 10 mm Compensation C 25 mm Mpo/Myo/Mro apply at the end of travel; Mp/My/Mr apply during travel. Compensation distances A/B/C in this load table are separate from body-dimension callouts with the same letters. Check the combined ratios Mp/Mpmax + My/Mymax + Mr/Mrmax ≤ 1, and separately Mpo/Mpomax + Myo/Myomax + Mro/Mromax ≤ 1. The catalog selection method uses E = 0.5 × (W/g) × (1.4 Va/1000)², with W in newtons, g = 9.81 m/s² and average speed Va in mm/s. Require E ≤ K × Emax and W ≤ K × β × Wmax. K is 1.0 for a top-mounted fixture and 0.6 for a front-mounted fixture; β is read from the speed-dependent load graph. Check actual offsets and all three moments, including stopping inertia. The catalog acceleration model is a = 1600(Va/1000)² with fixed cushioning or 400(Va/1000)² with hydraulic cushioning. For horizontal mounting, the catalog uses Mp = W(L1+A)/1000 and Mpo = Mp + Wa(L2+B)/(1000g). The transverse moment arm includes the guide offset C, giving C+L3. For vertical mounting, use the separate vertical formulas and add inertia to the static moment at the stroke end. The load/deflection graphs distinguish pitch, yaw and roll and the illustrated stroke; they do not promise zero deflection or one universal payload. The roll-deflection reference arm Lr for this bore is 65 mm. Mounting limits Parameter Details Tapped-hole body mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 10 mm Vertical end mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 6 mm Front-face fixture mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 8 mm Through-hole body mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.8 N·m; illustrated body thickness L 18 mm Top-face fixture mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 5.5 mm Keep screw penetration at least 0.5 mm below the maximum depth and within the actual detailed drawing. Mounting-table maxima do not override a shallower tapped hole shown in a particular view. Support the slide table while tightening fixture screws; holding only the body can transmit tightening torque into the guide and reduce accuracy. Maintain at least 3 mm separation from an adjacent magnetic cylinder to avoid sensor interference. Check all fixture clearances throughout travel. Use the selected symmetric or standard drawing for port access and stop placement. Begin flow adjustment slowly and remain within the energy, load and moment limits. Construction and materials The numbered entries follow the base-cylinder exploded drawing. Optional accessory assemblies are described separately above. Component Material 1 — Floating joint Low-carbon steel 2 — Bumper TPU 3 — Hex-socket screw Medium-carbon steel 4 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 5 — Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 6 — Rod seal NBR 7 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Bumper TPU 10 — Piston rod A Medium-carbon steel 11 — Piston rod B Stainless steel 12 — Body Aluminum alloy 13 — Magnet spacer Brass 14 — Magnet cushion NBR 15 — Magnet Sintered neodymium-iron-boron 16 — Piston seal NBR 17 — Piston Brass 18 — C retaining ring Spring steel 19 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 20 — Slide table Aluminum alloy 21 — Set screw Medium-carbon steel 22 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 23 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 24 — Crossed-roller guide assembly Assembly Series selection The standard strokes for the 12 mm bore are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100 mm. Options are fixed cushioning, A/AS/AF adjustable stops and B/BS/BF hydraulic shock absorbers. The option suffix identifies the equipped end(s). M5 ports apply to bores 6–16 mm; PT, G or NPT 1/8 choices are listed for bores 20/25 mm. Other bores or strokes require a specifically defined order. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify H (CMSH / DMSH / EMSH)-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 12 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 0.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses M5 × 0.8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 Flow control / silencer example PTLM5 / BSLM5 Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm This slide uses a twin-piston drive. The general single-cylinder circuit example is only an initial reference; size the actual flow supply for the complete actuator and required cycle time. Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The HLS cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in a matching sensor groove on the HLS cylinder body. Detection uses the magnet included in this S configuration. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes Use PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder chamber port; use straight PC4M5 fittings at the M5 valve A/B ports and keep the chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. Seat the M5 sealing gaskets correctly. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each selected M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads The gray fittings/controllers accept soft nylon or PU tube at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended controller-cap rotation torque is 0.05 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Check insertion and wrench clearance. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 4 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSLM5 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (M5×0.8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 10/8 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 878 g; an estimate using the same bore/stroke base cylinder. The published body weight does not separately include the selected accessory or port-thread variant, so this is not an official measured weight of the full configured assembly. The catalog lists the symmetric layout with the corresponding standard family. Actual product weight governs; this is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $476.73

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac HLS series: crossed-roller slide-table cylinder - HLS12X100SBF

  Specifications: HLS12X100SBF is a double-acting precision slide-table cylinder with a 12 mm bore, 100 mm stroke and built-in magnet. Its crossed-roller guide supports accurate linear travel. This is the standard layout. Hydraulic shock absorber at the retracting end. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 slide, clamp and stopper accessories (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning HLS Crossed-roller slide table; standard layout 12 12 mm bore X100 100 mm stroke S Built-in magnet BF Hydraulic shock absorber at the retracting end Technical specifications Parameter Details Action / working fluid Double acting / compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure — 2022 catalog 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Port M5 × 0.8 Standard cushioning Fixed rubber cushioning at both ends; selected stroke stops or shock absorbers as decoded above Guide / piston arrangement Crossed-roller guide with a twin-piston drive Applicable sensor family H profile: CMSH / DMSH / EMSH Edition note: the linked earlier English catalog specifies 0.15 MPa minimum operating pressure for this bore. The 2022 Chinese catalog specifies 0.15 MPa; the table above follows 2022. Use the requirements for the supplied edition when selecting the lower working pressure. Current-model dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the matching catalog drawing definitions; M and N in the body table are hole counts. Symmetric and standard layouts share table values but are not the same installation orientation. Parameter Details A 212 mm AB 202 mm AC 203 mm JB 76 mm JC 111 mm KB 65 mm LB 38 mm LC 35 mm M 6 holes N 5 holes PA 131.5 mm PB 50 mm R 115 mm Parameter Details height 32 mm front plate height 28 mm width 50 mm front plate thickness 8 mm front mounting 4–M4×0.7 depth6 top fixture screw M4×0.7 depth5.5 bottom screw M5×0.8 depth10 bottom counterbore Ø8 top transverse pitch 28 mm bottom transverse pitch 20 mm rear mounting 2–M5×0.8 depth8 rear local callouts 30 / 16 / 38 / 14.5 front local callouts 9 / 5 / 20 positioning hole Ø4 +0.03/0 depth3.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Selected stops and accessory dimensions The catalog accessory code for this configuration is F-HLS12BF. A comprises AS + AF; B comprises BS + BF. Standard and symmetric rear-end accessories are not interchangeable; the forward BS assembly is shared between the HLQ and HLS families only where the selection table lists it. F-HLS12BF: Hydraulic shock absorber at the retracting end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 17 mm at this end. Parameter Details A 31 mm B 29 mm C 18 mm D 16 mm E 40 mm E1 6 mm F 11 mm G 11 mm H 7 mm J M8×1 P M4 length12 Accessory-table letters describe the body-side and slide-side parts in the separate accessory drawing. Its 5 mm screw-adjustment entry, when present, is a component reference; use the installed-cylinder limits above for the assembled configuration. Parameter Details Specified shock absorber ACA0806-1N Maximum shock-absorber retaining-nut torque 1.67 N·m Do not adjust or remove the set screw at the back of the shock absorber: this can release oil and disable damping. A single-end BS or BF option provides hydraulic damping only at that specified end. Load and moment selection Parameter Details Reference Wmax 15 N; this is load weight, not kilograms Base / adjustable-stop allowable-energy reference Emax 0.05 J Hydraulic-stop Emax at a fitted B/BS/BF end 0.1 J; the opposite fixed-cushion end retains the base value on a single-end option Mpo maximum 78.8 N·m Myo maximum 71.9 N·m Mro maximum 48.6 N·m Mp maximum 14.7 N·m My maximum 14.7 N·m Mr maximum 6.8 N·m Compensation A 160 mm Compensation B 10 mm Compensation C 25 mm Mpo/Myo/Mro apply at the end of travel; Mp/My/Mr apply during travel. Compensation distances A/B/C in this load table are separate from body-dimension callouts with the same letters. Check the combined ratios Mp/Mpmax + My/Mymax + Mr/Mrmax ≤ 1, and separately Mpo/Mpomax + Myo/Myomax + Mro/Mromax ≤ 1. The catalog selection method uses E = 0.5 × (W/g) × (1.4 Va/1000)², with W in newtons, g = 9.81 m/s² and average speed Va in mm/s. Require E ≤ K × Emax and W ≤ K × β × Wmax. K is 1.0 for a top-mounted fixture and 0.6 for a front-mounted fixture; β is read from the speed-dependent load graph. Check actual offsets and all three moments, including stopping inertia. The catalog acceleration model is a = 1600(Va/1000)² with fixed cushioning or 400(Va/1000)² with hydraulic cushioning. For horizontal mounting, the catalog uses Mp = W(L1+A)/1000 and Mpo = Mp + Wa(L2+B)/(1000g). The transverse moment arm includes the guide offset C, giving C+L3. For vertical mounting, use the separate vertical formulas and add inertia to the static moment at the stroke end. The load/deflection graphs distinguish pitch, yaw and roll and the illustrated stroke; they do not promise zero deflection or one universal payload. The roll-deflection reference arm Lr for this bore is 65 mm. Mounting limits Parameter Details Tapped-hole body mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 10 mm Vertical end mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 6 mm Front-face fixture mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 8 mm Through-hole body mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.8 N·m; illustrated body thickness L 18 mm Top-face fixture mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 5.5 mm Keep screw penetration at least 0.5 mm below the maximum depth and within the actual detailed drawing. Mounting-table maxima do not override a shallower tapped hole shown in a particular view. Support the slide table while tightening fixture screws; holding only the body can transmit tightening torque into the guide and reduce accuracy. Maintain at least 3 mm separation from an adjacent magnetic cylinder to avoid sensor interference. Check all fixture clearances throughout travel. Use the selected symmetric or standard drawing for port access and stop placement. Begin flow adjustment slowly and remain within the energy, load and moment limits. Construction and materials The numbered entries follow the base-cylinder exploded drawing. Optional accessory assemblies are described separately above. Component Material 1 — Floating joint Low-carbon steel 2 — Bumper TPU 3 — Hex-socket screw Medium-carbon steel 4 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 5 — Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 6 — Rod seal NBR 7 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Bumper TPU 10 — Piston rod A Medium-carbon steel 11 — Piston rod B Stainless steel 12 — Body Aluminum alloy 13 — Magnet spacer Brass 14 — Magnet cushion NBR 15 — Magnet Sintered neodymium-iron-boron 16 — Piston seal NBR 17 — Piston Brass 18 — C retaining ring Spring steel 19 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 20 — Slide table Aluminum alloy 21 — Set screw Medium-carbon steel 22 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 23 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 24 — Crossed-roller guide assembly Assembly Series selection The standard strokes for the 12 mm bore are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100 mm. Options are fixed cushioning, A/AS/AF adjustable stops and B/BS/BF hydraulic shock absorbers. The option suffix identifies the equipped end(s). M5 ports apply to bores 6–16 mm; PT, G or NPT 1/8 choices are listed for bores 20/25 mm. Other bores or strokes require a specifically defined order. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify H (CMSH / DMSH / EMSH)-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 12 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 0.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses M5 × 0.8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 Flow control / silencer example PTLM5 / BSLM5 Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm This slide uses a twin-piston drive. The general single-cylinder circuit example is only an initial reference; size the actual flow supply for the complete actuator and required cycle time. Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The HLS cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in a matching sensor groove on the HLS cylinder body. Detection uses the magnet included in this S configuration. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes Use PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder chamber port; use straight PC4M5 fittings at the M5 valve A/B ports and keep the chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. Seat the M5 sealing gaskets correctly. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each selected M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads The gray fittings/controllers accept soft nylon or PU tube at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended controller-cap rotation torque is 0.05 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Check insertion and wrench clearance. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 4 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSLM5 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (M5×0.8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 10/8 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 878 g; an estimate using the same bore/stroke base cylinder. The published body weight does not separately include the selected accessory or port-thread variant, so this is not an official measured weight of the full configured assembly. The catalog lists the symmetric layout with the corresponding standard family. Actual product weight governs; this is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $428.65

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac HLS series: crossed-roller slide-table cylinder - HLS12X100SBS

  Specifications: HLS12X100SBS is a double-acting precision slide-table cylinder with a 12 mm bore, 100 mm stroke and built-in magnet. Its crossed-roller guide supports accurate linear travel. This is the standard layout. Hydraulic shock absorber at the forward end. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 slide, clamp and stopper accessories (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning HLS Crossed-roller slide table; standard layout 12 12 mm bore X100 100 mm stroke S Built-in magnet BS Hydraulic shock absorber at the forward end Technical specifications Parameter Details Action / working fluid Double acting / compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure — 2022 catalog 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Port M5 × 0.8 Standard cushioning Fixed rubber cushioning at both ends; selected stroke stops or shock absorbers as decoded above Guide / piston arrangement Crossed-roller guide with a twin-piston drive Applicable sensor family H profile: CMSH / DMSH / EMSH Edition note: the linked earlier English catalog specifies 0.15 MPa minimum operating pressure for this bore. The 2022 Chinese catalog specifies 0.15 MPa; the table above follows 2022. Use the requirements for the supplied edition when selecting the lower working pressure. Current-model dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the matching catalog drawing definitions; M and N in the body table are hole counts. Symmetric and standard layouts share table values but are not the same installation orientation. Parameter Details A 212 mm AB 202 mm AC 203 mm JB 76 mm JC 111 mm KB 65 mm LB 38 mm LC 35 mm M 6 holes N 5 holes PA 131.5 mm PB 50 mm R 115 mm Parameter Details height 32 mm front plate height 28 mm width 50 mm front plate thickness 8 mm front mounting 4–M4×0.7 depth6 top fixture screw M4×0.7 depth5.5 bottom screw M5×0.8 depth10 bottom counterbore Ø8 top transverse pitch 28 mm bottom transverse pitch 20 mm rear mounting 2–M5×0.8 depth8 rear local callouts 30 / 16 / 38 / 14.5 front local callouts 9 / 5 / 20 positioning hole Ø4 +0.03/0 depth3.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Selected stops and accessory dimensions The catalog accessory code for this configuration is F-HLQ12BS. A comprises AS + AF; B comprises BS + BF. Standard and symmetric rear-end accessories are not interchangeable; the forward BS assembly is shared between the HLQ and HLS families only where the selection table lists it. F-HLQ12BS: Hydraulic shock absorber at the forward end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 17.5 mm at this end. Parameter Details A 11 mm B 29 mm C 14 mm D 15.5 mm E 40 mm E1 6 mm F 11 mm G 7 mm M M8×1 P M4 length16 H 20 mm I 9 mm J 13.5 mm Q M4 length12 Accessory-table letters describe the body-side and slide-side parts in the separate accessory drawing. Its 5 mm screw-adjustment entry, when present, is a component reference; use the installed-cylinder limits above for the assembled configuration. Parameter Details Specified shock absorber ACA0806-1N Maximum shock-absorber retaining-nut torque 1.67 N·m Do not adjust or remove the set screw at the back of the shock absorber: this can release oil and disable damping. A single-end BS or BF option provides hydraulic damping only at that specified end. Load and moment selection Parameter Details Reference Wmax 15 N; this is load weight, not kilograms Base / adjustable-stop allowable-energy reference Emax 0.05 J Hydraulic-stop Emax at a fitted B/BS/BF end 0.1 J; the opposite fixed-cushion end retains the base value on a single-end option Mpo maximum 78.8 N·m Myo maximum 71.9 N·m Mro maximum 48.6 N·m Mp maximum 14.7 N·m My maximum 14.7 N·m Mr maximum 6.8 N·m Compensation A 160 mm Compensation B 10 mm Compensation C 25 mm Mpo/Myo/Mro apply at the end of travel; Mp/My/Mr apply during travel. Compensation distances A/B/C in this load table are separate from body-dimension callouts with the same letters. Check the combined ratios Mp/Mpmax + My/Mymax + Mr/Mrmax ≤ 1, and separately Mpo/Mpomax + Myo/Myomax + Mro/Mromax ≤ 1. The catalog selection method uses E = 0.5 × (W/g) × (1.4 Va/1000)², with W in newtons, g = 9.81 m/s² and average speed Va in mm/s. Require E ≤ K × Emax and W ≤ K × β × Wmax. K is 1.0 for a top-mounted fixture and 0.6 for a front-mounted fixture; β is read from the speed-dependent load graph. Check actual offsets and all three moments, including stopping inertia. The catalog acceleration model is a = 1600(Va/1000)² with fixed cushioning or 400(Va/1000)² with hydraulic cushioning. For horizontal mounting, the catalog uses Mp = W(L1+A)/1000 and Mpo = Mp + Wa(L2+B)/(1000g). The transverse moment arm includes the guide offset C, giving C+L3. For vertical mounting, use the separate vertical formulas and add inertia to the static moment at the stroke end. The load/deflection graphs distinguish pitch, yaw and roll and the illustrated stroke; they do not promise zero deflection or one universal payload. The roll-deflection reference arm Lr for this bore is 65 mm. Mounting limits Parameter Details Tapped-hole body mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 10 mm Vertical end mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 6 mm Front-face fixture mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 8 mm Through-hole body mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.8 N·m; illustrated body thickness L 18 mm Top-face fixture mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 5.5 mm Keep screw penetration at least 0.5 mm below the maximum depth and within the actual detailed drawing. Mounting-table maxima do not override a shallower tapped hole shown in a particular view. Support the slide table while tightening fixture screws; holding only the body can transmit tightening torque into the guide and reduce accuracy. Maintain at least 3 mm separation from an adjacent magnetic cylinder to avoid sensor interference. Check all fixture clearances throughout travel. Use the selected symmetric or standard drawing for port access and stop placement. Begin flow adjustment slowly and remain within the energy, load and moment limits. Construction and materials The numbered entries follow the base-cylinder exploded drawing. Optional accessory assemblies are described separately above. Component Material 1 — Floating joint Low-carbon steel 2 — Bumper TPU 3 — Hex-socket screw Medium-carbon steel 4 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 5 — Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 6 — Rod seal NBR 7 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Bumper TPU 10 — Piston rod A Medium-carbon steel 11 — Piston rod B Stainless steel 12 — Body Aluminum alloy 13 — Magnet spacer Brass 14 — Magnet cushion NBR 15 — Magnet Sintered neodymium-iron-boron 16 — Piston seal NBR 17 — Piston Brass 18 — C retaining ring Spring steel 19 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 20 — Slide table Aluminum alloy 21 — Set screw Medium-carbon steel 22 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 23 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 24 — Crossed-roller guide assembly Assembly Series selection The standard strokes for the 12 mm bore are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100 mm. Options are fixed cushioning, A/AS/AF adjustable stops and B/BS/BF hydraulic shock absorbers. The option suffix identifies the equipped end(s). M5 ports apply to bores 6–16 mm; PT, G or NPT 1/8 choices are listed for bores 20/25 mm. Other bores or strokes require a specifically defined order. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify H (CMSH / DMSH / EMSH)-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 12 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 0.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses M5 × 0.8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 Flow control / silencer example PTLM5 / BSLM5 Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm This slide uses a twin-piston drive. The general single-cylinder circuit example is only an initial reference; size the actual flow supply for the complete actuator and required cycle time. Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The HLS cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in a matching sensor groove on the HLS cylinder body. Detection uses the magnet included in this S configuration. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes Use PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder chamber port; use straight PC4M5 fittings at the M5 valve A/B ports and keep the chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. Seat the M5 sealing gaskets correctly. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each selected M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads The gray fittings/controllers accept soft nylon or PU tube at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended controller-cap rotation torque is 0.05 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Check insertion and wrench clearance. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 4 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSLM5 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (M5×0.8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 10/8 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 878 g; an estimate using the same bore/stroke base cylinder. The published body weight does not separately include the selected accessory or port-thread variant, so this is not an official measured weight of the full configured assembly. The catalog lists the symmetric layout with the corresponding standard family. Actual product weight governs; this is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $435.63

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac HLS series: crossed-roller slide-table cylinder - HLS12X10S

  Specifications: HLS12X10S is a double-acting precision slide-table cylinder with a 12 mm bore, 10 mm stroke and built-in magnet. Its crossed-roller guide supports accurate linear travel. This is the standard layout. Fixed rubber cushioning; no optional stroke-stop assembly. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning HLS Crossed-roller slide table; standard layout 12 12 mm bore X10 10 mm stroke S Built-in magnet Technical specifications Parameter Details Action / working fluid Double acting / compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure — 2022 catalog 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Port M5 × 0.8 Standard cushioning Fixed rubber cushioning at both ends; selected stroke stops or shock absorbers as decoded above Guide / piston arrangement Crossed-roller guide with a twin-piston drive Applicable sensor family H profile: CMSH / DMSH / EMSH Edition note: the linked earlier English catalog specifies 0.15 MPa minimum operating pressure for this bore. The 2022 Chinese catalog specifies 0.15 MPa; the table above follows 2022. Use the requirements for the supplied edition when selecting the lower working pressure. Current-model dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the matching catalog drawing definitions; M and N in the body table are hole counts. Symmetric and standard layouts share table values but are not the same installation orientation. Parameter Details A 80 mm AB 70 mm AC 71 mm JB 40 mm JC 15 mm KB 35 mm LB 40 mm LC 15 mm M 4 holes N 2 holes PA 39.5 mm PB 10 mm R 25 mm Parameter Details height 32 mm front plate height 28 mm width 50 mm front plate thickness 8 mm front mounting 4–M4×0.7 depth6 top fixture screw M4×0.7 depth5.5 bottom screw M5×0.8 depth10 bottom counterbore Ø8 top transverse pitch 28 mm bottom transverse pitch 20 mm rear mounting 2–M5×0.8 depth8 rear local callouts 30 / 16 / 38 / 14.5 front local callouts 9 / 5 / 20 positioning hole Ø4 +0.03/0 depth3.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Selected stops and accessory dimensions No optional A/AS/AF/B/BS/BF assembly is selected in this model. The fixed cushioning remains part of the base cylinder. Load and moment selection Parameter Details Reference Wmax 15 N; this is load weight, not kilograms Base / adjustable-stop allowable-energy reference Emax 0.05 J Hydraulic-stop Emax at a fitted B/BS/BF end 0.1 J; the opposite fixed-cushion end retains the base value on a single-end option Mpo maximum 33 N·m Myo maximum 34.3 N·m Mro maximum 30.9 N·m Mp maximum 7.3 N·m My maximum 7.3 N·m Mr maximum 5.8 N·m Compensation A 48 mm Compensation B 10 mm Compensation C 25 mm Mpo/Myo/Mro apply at the end of travel; Mp/My/Mr apply during travel. Compensation distances A/B/C in this load table are separate from body-dimension callouts with the same letters. Check the combined ratios Mp/Mpmax + My/Mymax + Mr/Mrmax ≤ 1, and separately Mpo/Mpomax + Myo/Myomax + Mro/Mromax ≤ 1. The catalog selection method uses E = 0.5 × (W/g) × (1.4 Va/1000)², with W in newtons, g = 9.81 m/s² and average speed Va in mm/s. Require E ≤ K × Emax and W ≤ K × β × Wmax. K is 1.0 for a top-mounted fixture and 0.6 for a front-mounted fixture; β is read from the speed-dependent load graph. Check actual offsets and all three moments, including stopping inertia. The catalog acceleration model is a = 1600(Va/1000)² with fixed cushioning or 400(Va/1000)² with hydraulic cushioning. For horizontal mounting, the catalog uses Mp = W(L1+A)/1000 and Mpo = Mp + Wa(L2+B)/(1000g). The transverse moment arm includes the guide offset C, giving C+L3. For vertical mounting, use the separate vertical formulas and add inertia to the static moment at the stroke end. The load/deflection graphs distinguish pitch, yaw and roll and the illustrated stroke; they do not promise zero deflection or one universal payload. The roll-deflection reference arm Lr for this bore is 65 mm. Mounting limits Parameter Details Tapped-hole body mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 10 mm Vertical end mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 6 mm Front-face fixture mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 8 mm Through-hole body mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.8 N·m; illustrated body thickness L 18 mm Top-face fixture mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 5.5 mm Keep screw penetration at least 0.5 mm below the maximum depth and within the actual detailed drawing. Mounting-table maxima do not override a shallower tapped hole shown in a particular view. Support the slide table while tightening fixture screws; holding only the body can transmit tightening torque into the guide and reduce accuracy. Maintain at least 3 mm separation from an adjacent magnetic cylinder to avoid sensor interference. Check all fixture clearances throughout travel. Use the selected symmetric or standard drawing for port access and stop placement. Begin flow adjustment slowly and remain within the energy, load and moment limits. Construction and materials The numbered entries follow the base-cylinder exploded drawing. Optional accessory assemblies are described separately above. Component Material 1 — Floating joint Low-carbon steel 2 — Bumper TPU 3 — Hex-socket screw Medium-carbon steel 4 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 5 — Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 6 — Rod seal NBR 7 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Bumper TPU 10 — Piston rod A Medium-carbon steel 11 — Piston rod B Stainless steel 12 — Body Aluminum alloy 13 — Magnet spacer Brass 14 — Magnet cushion NBR 15 — Magnet Sintered neodymium-iron-boron 16 — Piston seal NBR 17 — Piston Brass 18 — C retaining ring Spring steel 19 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 20 — Slide table Aluminum alloy 21 — Set screw Medium-carbon steel 22 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 23 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 24 — Crossed-roller guide assembly Assembly Series selection The standard strokes for the 12 mm bore are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100 mm. Options are fixed cushioning, A/AS/AF adjustable stops and B/BS/BF hydraulic shock absorbers. The option suffix identifies the equipped end(s). M5 ports apply to bores 6–16 mm; PT, G or NPT 1/8 choices are listed for bores 20/25 mm. Other bores or strokes require a specifically defined order. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify H (CMSH / DMSH / EMSH)-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 12 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 0.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses M5 × 0.8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 Flow control / silencer example PTLM5 / BSLM5 Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm This slide uses a twin-piston drive. The general single-cylinder circuit example is only an initial reference; size the actual flow supply for the complete actuator and required cycle time. Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The HLS cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in a matching sensor groove on the HLS cylinder body. Detection uses the magnet included in this S configuration. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes Use PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder chamber port; use straight PC4M5 fittings at the M5 valve A/B ports and keep the chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. Seat the M5 sealing gaskets correctly. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each selected M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads The gray fittings/controllers accept soft nylon or PU tube at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended controller-cap rotation torque is 0.05 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Check insertion and wrench clearance. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 4 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSLM5 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (M5×0.8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 10/8 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 352 g, from the 2022 base-cylinder weight-reference table. The catalog lists the symmetric layout with the corresponding standard family. Actual product weight governs; this is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $211.61

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac HLS series: crossed-roller slide-table cylinder - HLS12X10SA

  Specifications: HLS12X10SA is a double-acting precision slide-table cylinder with a 12 mm bore, 10 mm stroke and built-in magnet. Its crossed-roller guide supports accurate linear travel. This is the standard layout. Adjustable stroke stops at both ends. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 slide, clamp and stopper accessories (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning HLS Crossed-roller slide table; standard layout 12 12 mm bore X10 10 mm stroke S Built-in magnet A Adjustable stroke stops at both ends Technical specifications Parameter Details Action / working fluid Double acting / compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure — 2022 catalog 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Port M5 × 0.8 Standard cushioning Fixed rubber cushioning at both ends; selected stroke stops or shock absorbers as decoded above Guide / piston arrangement Crossed-roller guide with a twin-piston drive Applicable sensor family H profile: CMSH / DMSH / EMSH Edition note: the linked earlier English catalog specifies 0.15 MPa minimum operating pressure for this bore. The 2022 Chinese catalog specifies 0.15 MPa; the table above follows 2022. Use the requirements for the supplied edition when selecting the lower working pressure. Current-model dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the matching catalog drawing definitions; M and N in the body table are hole counts. Symmetric and standard layouts share table values but are not the same installation orientation. Parameter Details A 80 mm AB 70 mm AC 71 mm JB 40 mm JC 15 mm KB 35 mm LB 40 mm LC 15 mm M 4 holes N 2 holes PA 39.5 mm PB 10 mm R 25 mm Parameter Details height 32 mm front plate height 28 mm width 50 mm front plate thickness 8 mm front mounting 4–M4×0.7 depth6 top fixture screw M4×0.7 depth5.5 bottom screw M5×0.8 depth10 bottom counterbore Ø8 top transverse pitch 28 mm bottom transverse pitch 20 mm rear mounting 2–M5×0.8 depth8 rear local callouts 30 / 16 / 38 / 14.5 front local callouts 9 / 5 / 20 positioning hole Ø4 +0.03/0 depth3.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Selected stops and accessory dimensions The catalog accessory code for this configuration is F-HLS12A. A comprises AS + AF; B comprises BS + BF. Standard and symmetric rear-end accessories are not interchangeable; the forward BS assembly is shared between the HLQ and HLS families only where the selection table lists it. F-HLS12AS: Adjustable stroke stop at the forward end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 6 mm at this end. Parameter Details adjustment 5 mm A 11 mm B 29 mm C 15.5 mm D 21.5 mm E 11 mm F 4 mm M M8×1 P M4 length16 H 20 mm I 9 mm J 13.5 mm Q M4 length12 F-HLS12AF: Adjustable stroke stop at the retracting end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 5 mm at this end. Parameter Details adjustment 5 mm A 31 mm B 29 mm C 18 mm D 16 mm E 21.5 mm F 11 mm G 11 mm H 4 mm J M4 length12 K M8×1 Accessory-table letters describe the body-side and slide-side parts in the separate accessory drawing. Its 5 mm screw-adjustment entry, when present, is a component reference; use the installed-cylinder limits above for the assembled configuration. Load and moment selection Parameter Details Reference Wmax 15 N; this is load weight, not kilograms Base / adjustable-stop allowable-energy reference Emax 0.05 J Hydraulic-stop Emax at a fitted B/BS/BF end 0.1 J; the opposite fixed-cushion end retains the base value on a single-end option Mpo maximum 33 N·m Myo maximum 34.3 N·m Mro maximum 30.9 N·m Mp maximum 7.3 N·m My maximum 7.3 N·m Mr maximum 5.8 N·m Compensation A 48 mm Compensation B 10 mm Compensation C 25 mm Mpo/Myo/Mro apply at the end of travel; Mp/My/Mr apply during travel. Compensation distances A/B/C in this load table are separate from body-dimension callouts with the same letters. Check the combined ratios Mp/Mpmax + My/Mymax + Mr/Mrmax ≤ 1, and separately Mpo/Mpomax + Myo/Myomax + Mro/Mromax ≤ 1. The catalog selection method uses E = 0.5 × (W/g) × (1.4 Va/1000)², with W in newtons, g = 9.81 m/s² and average speed Va in mm/s. Require E ≤ K × Emax and W ≤ K × β × Wmax. K is 1.0 for a top-mounted fixture and 0.6 for a front-mounted fixture; β is read from the speed-dependent load graph. Check actual offsets and all three moments, including stopping inertia. The catalog acceleration model is a = 1600(Va/1000)² with fixed cushioning or 400(Va/1000)² with hydraulic cushioning. For horizontal mounting, the catalog uses Mp = W(L1+A)/1000 and Mpo = Mp + Wa(L2+B)/(1000g). The transverse moment arm includes the guide offset C, giving C+L3. For vertical mounting, use the separate vertical formulas and add inertia to the static moment at the stroke end. The load/deflection graphs distinguish pitch, yaw and roll and the illustrated stroke; they do not promise zero deflection or one universal payload. The roll-deflection reference arm Lr for this bore is 65 mm. Mounting limits Parameter Details Tapped-hole body mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 10 mm Vertical end mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 6 mm Front-face fixture mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 8 mm Through-hole body mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.8 N·m; illustrated body thickness L 18 mm Top-face fixture mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 5.5 mm Keep screw penetration at least 0.5 mm below the maximum depth and within the actual detailed drawing. Mounting-table maxima do not override a shallower tapped hole shown in a particular view. Support the slide table while tightening fixture screws; holding only the body can transmit tightening torque into the guide and reduce accuracy. Maintain at least 3 mm separation from an adjacent magnetic cylinder to avoid sensor interference. Check all fixture clearances throughout travel. Use the selected symmetric or standard drawing for port access and stop placement. Begin flow adjustment slowly and remain within the energy, load and moment limits. Construction and materials The numbered entries follow the base-cylinder exploded drawing. Optional accessory assemblies are described separately above. Component Material 1 — Floating joint Low-carbon steel 2 — Bumper TPU 3 — Hex-socket screw Medium-carbon steel 4 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 5 — Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 6 — Rod seal NBR 7 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Bumper TPU 10 — Piston rod A Medium-carbon steel 11 — Piston rod B Stainless steel 12 — Body Aluminum alloy 13 — Magnet spacer Brass 14 — Magnet cushion NBR 15 — Magnet Sintered neodymium-iron-boron 16 — Piston seal NBR 17 — Piston Brass 18 — C retaining ring Spring steel 19 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 20 — Slide table Aluminum alloy 21 — Set screw Medium-carbon steel 22 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 23 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 24 — Crossed-roller guide assembly Assembly Series selection The standard strokes for the 12 mm bore are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100 mm. Options are fixed cushioning, A/AS/AF adjustable stops and B/BS/BF hydraulic shock absorbers. The option suffix identifies the equipped end(s). M5 ports apply to bores 6–16 mm; PT, G or NPT 1/8 choices are listed for bores 20/25 mm. Other bores or strokes require a specifically defined order. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify H (CMSH / DMSH / EMSH)-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 12 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 0.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses M5 × 0.8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 Flow control / silencer example PTLM5 / BSLM5 Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm This slide uses a twin-piston drive. The general single-cylinder circuit example is only an initial reference; size the actual flow supply for the complete actuator and required cycle time. Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The HLS cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in a matching sensor groove on the HLS cylinder body. Detection uses the magnet included in this S configuration. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes Use PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder chamber port; use straight PC4M5 fittings at the M5 valve A/B ports and keep the chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. Seat the M5 sealing gaskets correctly. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each selected M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads The gray fittings/controllers accept soft nylon or PU tube at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended controller-cap rotation torque is 0.05 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Check insertion and wrench clearance. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 4 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSLM5 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (M5×0.8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 10/8 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 352 g; an estimate using the same bore/stroke base cylinder. The published body weight does not separately include the selected accessory or port-thread variant, so this is not an official measured weight of the full configured assembly. The catalog lists the symmetric layout with the corresponding standard family. Actual product weight governs; this is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $243.81

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac HLS series: crossed-roller slide-table cylinder - HLS12X10SAF

  Specifications: HLS12X10SAF is a double-acting precision slide-table cylinder with a 12 mm bore, 10 mm stroke and built-in magnet. Its crossed-roller guide supports accurate linear travel. This is the standard layout. Adjustable stroke stop at the retracting end. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 slide, clamp and stopper accessories (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning HLS Crossed-roller slide table; standard layout 12 12 mm bore X10 10 mm stroke S Built-in magnet AF Adjustable stroke stop at the retracting end Technical specifications Parameter Details Action / working fluid Double acting / compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure — 2022 catalog 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Port M5 × 0.8 Standard cushioning Fixed rubber cushioning at both ends; selected stroke stops or shock absorbers as decoded above Guide / piston arrangement Crossed-roller guide with a twin-piston drive Applicable sensor family H profile: CMSH / DMSH / EMSH Edition note: the linked earlier English catalog specifies 0.15 MPa minimum operating pressure for this bore. The 2022 Chinese catalog specifies 0.15 MPa; the table above follows 2022. Use the requirements for the supplied edition when selecting the lower working pressure. Current-model dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the matching catalog drawing definitions; M and N in the body table are hole counts. Symmetric and standard layouts share table values but are not the same installation orientation. Parameter Details A 80 mm AB 70 mm AC 71 mm JB 40 mm JC 15 mm KB 35 mm LB 40 mm LC 15 mm M 4 holes N 2 holes PA 39.5 mm PB 10 mm R 25 mm Parameter Details height 32 mm front plate height 28 mm width 50 mm front plate thickness 8 mm front mounting 4–M4×0.7 depth6 top fixture screw M4×0.7 depth5.5 bottom screw M5×0.8 depth10 bottom counterbore Ø8 top transverse pitch 28 mm bottom transverse pitch 20 mm rear mounting 2–M5×0.8 depth8 rear local callouts 30 / 16 / 38 / 14.5 front local callouts 9 / 5 / 20 positioning hole Ø4 +0.03/0 depth3.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Selected stops and accessory dimensions The catalog accessory code for this configuration is F-HLS12AF. A comprises AS + AF; B comprises BS + BF. Standard and symmetric rear-end accessories are not interchangeable; the forward BS assembly is shared between the HLQ and HLS families only where the selection table lists it. F-HLS12AF: Adjustable stroke stop at the retracting end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 5 mm at this end. Parameter Details adjustment 5 mm A 31 mm B 29 mm C 18 mm D 16 mm E 21.5 mm F 11 mm G 11 mm H 4 mm J M4 length12 K M8×1 Accessory-table letters describe the body-side and slide-side parts in the separate accessory drawing. Its 5 mm screw-adjustment entry, when present, is a component reference; use the installed-cylinder limits above for the assembled configuration. Load and moment selection Parameter Details Reference Wmax 15 N; this is load weight, not kilograms Base / adjustable-stop allowable-energy reference Emax 0.05 J Hydraulic-stop Emax at a fitted B/BS/BF end 0.1 J; the opposite fixed-cushion end retains the base value on a single-end option Mpo maximum 33 N·m Myo maximum 34.3 N·m Mro maximum 30.9 N·m Mp maximum 7.3 N·m My maximum 7.3 N·m Mr maximum 5.8 N·m Compensation A 48 mm Compensation B 10 mm Compensation C 25 mm Mpo/Myo/Mro apply at the end of travel; Mp/My/Mr apply during travel. Compensation distances A/B/C in this load table are separate from body-dimension callouts with the same letters. Check the combined ratios Mp/Mpmax + My/Mymax + Mr/Mrmax ≤ 1, and separately Mpo/Mpomax + Myo/Myomax + Mro/Mromax ≤ 1. The catalog selection method uses E = 0.5 × (W/g) × (1.4 Va/1000)², with W in newtons, g = 9.81 m/s² and average speed Va in mm/s. Require E ≤ K × Emax and W ≤ K × β × Wmax. K is 1.0 for a top-mounted fixture and 0.6 for a front-mounted fixture; β is read from the speed-dependent load graph. Check actual offsets and all three moments, including stopping inertia. The catalog acceleration model is a = 1600(Va/1000)² with fixed cushioning or 400(Va/1000)² with hydraulic cushioning. For horizontal mounting, the catalog uses Mp = W(L1+A)/1000 and Mpo = Mp + Wa(L2+B)/(1000g). The transverse moment arm includes the guide offset C, giving C+L3. For vertical mounting, use the separate vertical formulas and add inertia to the static moment at the stroke end. The load/deflection graphs distinguish pitch, yaw and roll and the illustrated stroke; they do not promise zero deflection or one universal payload. The roll-deflection reference arm Lr for this bore is 65 mm. Mounting limits Parameter Details Tapped-hole body mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 10 mm Vertical end mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 6 mm Front-face fixture mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 8 mm Through-hole body mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.8 N·m; illustrated body thickness L 18 mm Top-face fixture mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 5.5 mm Keep screw penetration at least 0.5 mm below the maximum depth and within the actual detailed drawing. Mounting-table maxima do not override a shallower tapped hole shown in a particular view. Support the slide table while tightening fixture screws; holding only the body can transmit tightening torque into the guide and reduce accuracy. Maintain at least 3 mm separation from an adjacent magnetic cylinder to avoid sensor interference. Check all fixture clearances throughout travel. Use the selected symmetric or standard drawing for port access and stop placement. Begin flow adjustment slowly and remain within the energy, load and moment limits. Construction and materials The numbered entries follow the base-cylinder exploded drawing. Optional accessory assemblies are described separately above. Component Material 1 — Floating joint Low-carbon steel 2 — Bumper TPU 3 — Hex-socket screw Medium-carbon steel 4 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 5 — Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 6 — Rod seal NBR 7 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Bumper TPU 10 — Piston rod A Medium-carbon steel 11 — Piston rod B Stainless steel 12 — Body Aluminum alloy 13 — Magnet spacer Brass 14 — Magnet cushion NBR 15 — Magnet Sintered neodymium-iron-boron 16 — Piston seal NBR 17 — Piston Brass 18 — C retaining ring Spring steel 19 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 20 — Slide table Aluminum alloy 21 — Set screw Medium-carbon steel 22 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 23 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 24 — Crossed-roller guide assembly Assembly Series selection The standard strokes for the 12 mm bore are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100 mm. Options are fixed cushioning, A/AS/AF adjustable stops and B/BS/BF hydraulic shock absorbers. The option suffix identifies the equipped end(s). M5 ports apply to bores 6–16 mm; PT, G or NPT 1/8 choices are listed for bores 20/25 mm. Other bores or strokes require a specifically defined order. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify H (CMSH / DMSH / EMSH)-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 12 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 0.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses M5 × 0.8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 Flow control / silencer example PTLM5 / BSLM5 Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm This slide uses a twin-piston drive. The general single-cylinder circuit example is only an initial reference; size the actual flow supply for the complete actuator and required cycle time. Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The HLS cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in a matching sensor groove on the HLS cylinder body. Detection uses the magnet included in this S configuration. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes Use PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder chamber port; use straight PC4M5 fittings at the M5 valve A/B ports and keep the chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. Seat the M5 sealing gaskets correctly. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each selected M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads The gray fittings/controllers accept soft nylon or PU tube at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended controller-cap rotation torque is 0.05 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Check insertion and wrench clearance. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 4 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSLM5 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (M5×0.8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 10/8 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 352 g; an estimate using the same bore/stroke base cylinder. The published body weight does not separately include the selected accessory or port-thread variant, so this is not an official measured weight of the full configured assembly. The catalog lists the symmetric layout with the corresponding standard family. Actual product weight governs; this is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $225.04

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac HLS series: crossed-roller slide-table cylinder - HLS12X10SAS

  Specifications: HLS12X10SAS is a double-acting precision slide-table cylinder with a 12 mm bore, 10 mm stroke and built-in magnet. Its crossed-roller guide supports accurate linear travel. This is the standard layout. Adjustable stroke stop at the forward end. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 slide, clamp and stopper accessories (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning HLS Crossed-roller slide table; standard layout 12 12 mm bore X10 10 mm stroke S Built-in magnet AS Adjustable stroke stop at the forward end Technical specifications Parameter Details Action / working fluid Double acting / compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure — 2022 catalog 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Port M5 × 0.8 Standard cushioning Fixed rubber cushioning at both ends; selected stroke stops or shock absorbers as decoded above Guide / piston arrangement Crossed-roller guide with a twin-piston drive Applicable sensor family H profile: CMSH / DMSH / EMSH Edition note: the linked earlier English catalog specifies 0.15 MPa minimum operating pressure for this bore. The 2022 Chinese catalog specifies 0.15 MPa; the table above follows 2022. Use the requirements for the supplied edition when selecting the lower working pressure. Current-model dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the matching catalog drawing definitions; M and N in the body table are hole counts. Symmetric and standard layouts share table values but are not the same installation orientation. Parameter Details A 80 mm AB 70 mm AC 71 mm JB 40 mm JC 15 mm KB 35 mm LB 40 mm LC 15 mm M 4 holes N 2 holes PA 39.5 mm PB 10 mm R 25 mm Parameter Details height 32 mm front plate height 28 mm width 50 mm front plate thickness 8 mm front mounting 4–M4×0.7 depth6 top fixture screw M4×0.7 depth5.5 bottom screw M5×0.8 depth10 bottom counterbore Ø8 top transverse pitch 28 mm bottom transverse pitch 20 mm rear mounting 2–M5×0.8 depth8 rear local callouts 30 / 16 / 38 / 14.5 front local callouts 9 / 5 / 20 positioning hole Ø4 +0.03/0 depth3.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Selected stops and accessory dimensions The catalog accessory code for this configuration is F-HLS12AS. A comprises AS + AF; B comprises BS + BF. Standard and symmetric rear-end accessories are not interchangeable; the forward BS assembly is shared between the HLQ and HLS families only where the selection table lists it. F-HLS12AS: Adjustable stroke stop at the forward end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 6 mm at this end. Parameter Details adjustment 5 mm A 11 mm B 29 mm C 15.5 mm D 21.5 mm E 11 mm F 4 mm M M8×1 P M4 length16 H 20 mm I 9 mm J 13.5 mm Q M4 length12 Accessory-table letters describe the body-side and slide-side parts in the separate accessory drawing. Its 5 mm screw-adjustment entry, when present, is a component reference; use the installed-cylinder limits above for the assembled configuration. Load and moment selection Parameter Details Reference Wmax 15 N; this is load weight, not kilograms Base / adjustable-stop allowable-energy reference Emax 0.05 J Hydraulic-stop Emax at a fitted B/BS/BF end 0.1 J; the opposite fixed-cushion end retains the base value on a single-end option Mpo maximum 33 N·m Myo maximum 34.3 N·m Mro maximum 30.9 N·m Mp maximum 7.3 N·m My maximum 7.3 N·m Mr maximum 5.8 N·m Compensation A 48 mm Compensation B 10 mm Compensation C 25 mm Mpo/Myo/Mro apply at the end of travel; Mp/My/Mr apply during travel. Compensation distances A/B/C in this load table are separate from body-dimension callouts with the same letters. Check the combined ratios Mp/Mpmax + My/Mymax + Mr/Mrmax ≤ 1, and separately Mpo/Mpomax + Myo/Myomax + Mro/Mromax ≤ 1. The catalog selection method uses E = 0.5 × (W/g) × (1.4 Va/1000)², with W in newtons, g = 9.81 m/s² and average speed Va in mm/s. Require E ≤ K × Emax and W ≤ K × β × Wmax. K is 1.0 for a top-mounted fixture and 0.6 for a front-mounted fixture; β is read from the speed-dependent load graph. Check actual offsets and all three moments, including stopping inertia. The catalog acceleration model is a = 1600(Va/1000)² with fixed cushioning or 400(Va/1000)² with hydraulic cushioning. For horizontal mounting, the catalog uses Mp = W(L1+A)/1000 and Mpo = Mp + Wa(L2+B)/(1000g). The transverse moment arm includes the guide offset C, giving C+L3. For vertical mounting, use the separate vertical formulas and add inertia to the static moment at the stroke end. The load/deflection graphs distinguish pitch, yaw and roll and the illustrated stroke; they do not promise zero deflection or one universal payload. The roll-deflection reference arm Lr for this bore is 65 mm. Mounting limits Parameter Details Tapped-hole body mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 10 mm Vertical end mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 6 mm Front-face fixture mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 8 mm Through-hole body mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.8 N·m; illustrated body thickness L 18 mm Top-face fixture mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 5.5 mm Keep screw penetration at least 0.5 mm below the maximum depth and within the actual detailed drawing. Mounting-table maxima do not override a shallower tapped hole shown in a particular view. Support the slide table while tightening fixture screws; holding only the body can transmit tightening torque into the guide and reduce accuracy. Maintain at least 3 mm separation from an adjacent magnetic cylinder to avoid sensor interference. Check all fixture clearances throughout travel. Use the selected symmetric or standard drawing for port access and stop placement. Begin flow adjustment slowly and remain within the energy, load and moment limits. Construction and materials The numbered entries follow the base-cylinder exploded drawing. Optional accessory assemblies are described separately above. Component Material 1 — Floating joint Low-carbon steel 2 — Bumper TPU 3 — Hex-socket screw Medium-carbon steel 4 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 5 — Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 6 — Rod seal NBR 7 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Bumper TPU 10 — Piston rod A Medium-carbon steel 11 — Piston rod B Stainless steel 12 — Body Aluminum alloy 13 — Magnet spacer Brass 14 — Magnet cushion NBR 15 — Magnet Sintered neodymium-iron-boron 16 — Piston seal NBR 17 — Piston Brass 18 — C retaining ring Spring steel 19 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 20 — Slide table Aluminum alloy 21 — Set screw Medium-carbon steel 22 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 23 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 24 — Crossed-roller guide assembly Assembly Series selection The standard strokes for the 12 mm bore are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100 mm. Options are fixed cushioning, A/AS/AF adjustable stops and B/BS/BF hydraulic shock absorbers. The option suffix identifies the equipped end(s). M5 ports apply to bores 6–16 mm; PT, G or NPT 1/8 choices are listed for bores 20/25 mm. Other bores or strokes require a specifically defined order. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify H (CMSH / DMSH / EMSH)-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 12 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 0.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses M5 × 0.8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 Flow control / silencer example PTLM5 / BSLM5 Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm This slide uses a twin-piston drive. The general single-cylinder circuit example is only an initial reference; size the actual flow supply for the complete actuator and required cycle time. Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The HLS cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in a matching sensor groove on the HLS cylinder body. Detection uses the magnet included in this S configuration. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes Use PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder chamber port; use straight PC4M5 fittings at the M5 valve A/B ports and keep the chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. Seat the M5 sealing gaskets correctly. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each selected M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads The gray fittings/controllers accept soft nylon or PU tube at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended controller-cap rotation torque is 0.05 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Check insertion and wrench clearance. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 4 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSLM5 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (M5×0.8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 10/8 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 352 g; an estimate using the same bore/stroke base cylinder. The published body weight does not separately include the selected accessory or port-thread variant, so this is not an official measured weight of the full configured assembly. The catalog lists the symmetric layout with the corresponding standard family. Actual product weight governs; this is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $232.16

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac HLS series: crossed-roller slide-table cylinder - HLS12X10SB

  Specifications: HLS12X10SB is a double-acting precision slide-table cylinder with a 12 mm bore, 10 mm stroke and built-in magnet. Its crossed-roller guide supports accurate linear travel. This is the standard layout. Hydraulic shock absorbers at both ends. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 slide, clamp and stopper accessories (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning HLS Crossed-roller slide table; standard layout 12 12 mm bore X10 10 mm stroke S Built-in magnet B Hydraulic shock absorbers at both ends Technical specifications Parameter Details Action / working fluid Double acting / compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure — 2022 catalog 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Port M5 × 0.8 Standard cushioning Fixed rubber cushioning at both ends; selected stroke stops or shock absorbers as decoded above Guide / piston arrangement Crossed-roller guide with a twin-piston drive Applicable sensor family H profile: CMSH / DMSH / EMSH Edition note: the linked earlier English catalog specifies 0.15 MPa minimum operating pressure for this bore. The 2022 Chinese catalog specifies 0.15 MPa; the table above follows 2022. Use the requirements for the supplied edition when selecting the lower working pressure. Current-model dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the matching catalog drawing definitions; M and N in the body table are hole counts. Symmetric and standard layouts share table values but are not the same installation orientation. Parameter Details A 80 mm AB 70 mm AC 71 mm JB 40 mm JC 15 mm KB 35 mm LB 40 mm LC 15 mm M 4 holes N 2 holes PA 39.5 mm PB 10 mm R 25 mm Parameter Details height 32 mm front plate height 28 mm width 50 mm front plate thickness 8 mm front mounting 4–M4×0.7 depth6 top fixture screw M4×0.7 depth5.5 bottom screw M5×0.8 depth10 bottom counterbore Ø8 top transverse pitch 28 mm bottom transverse pitch 20 mm rear mounting 2–M5×0.8 depth8 rear local callouts 30 / 16 / 38 / 14.5 front local callouts 9 / 5 / 20 positioning hole Ø4 +0.03/0 depth3.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Selected stops and accessory dimensions The catalog accessory code for this configuration is F-HLS12B. A comprises AS + AF; B comprises BS + BF. Standard and symmetric rear-end accessories are not interchangeable; the forward BS assembly is shared between the HLQ and HLS families only where the selection table lists it. F-HLQ12BS: Hydraulic shock absorber at the forward end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 17.5 mm at this end. Parameter Details A 11 mm B 29 mm C 14 mm D 15.5 mm E 40 mm E1 6 mm F 11 mm G 7 mm M M8×1 P M4 length16 H 20 mm I 9 mm J 13.5 mm Q M4 length12 F-HLS12BF: Hydraulic shock absorber at the retracting end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 17 mm at this end. Parameter Details A 31 mm B 29 mm C 18 mm D 16 mm E 40 mm E1 6 mm F 11 mm G 11 mm H 7 mm J M8×1 P M4 length12 Accessory-table letters describe the body-side and slide-side parts in the separate accessory drawing. Its 5 mm screw-adjustment entry, when present, is a component reference; use the installed-cylinder limits above for the assembled configuration. Parameter Details Specified shock absorber ACA0806-1N Maximum shock-absorber retaining-nut torque 1.67 N·m Do not adjust or remove the set screw at the back of the shock absorber: this can release oil and disable damping. A single-end BS or BF option provides hydraulic damping only at that specified end. Load and moment selection Parameter Details Reference Wmax 15 N; this is load weight, not kilograms Base / adjustable-stop allowable-energy reference Emax 0.05 J Hydraulic-stop Emax at a fitted B/BS/BF end 0.1 J; the opposite fixed-cushion end retains the base value on a single-end option Mpo maximum 33 N·m Myo maximum 34.3 N·m Mro maximum 30.9 N·m Mp maximum 7.3 N·m My maximum 7.3 N·m Mr maximum 5.8 N·m Compensation A 48 mm Compensation B 10 mm Compensation C 25 mm Mpo/Myo/Mro apply at the end of travel; Mp/My/Mr apply during travel. Compensation distances A/B/C in this load table are separate from body-dimension callouts with the same letters. Check the combined ratios Mp/Mpmax + My/Mymax + Mr/Mrmax ≤ 1, and separately Mpo/Mpomax + Myo/Myomax + Mro/Mromax ≤ 1. The catalog selection method uses E = 0.5 × (W/g) × (1.4 Va/1000)², with W in newtons, g = 9.81 m/s² and average speed Va in mm/s. Require E ≤ K × Emax and W ≤ K × β × Wmax. K is 1.0 for a top-mounted fixture and 0.6 for a front-mounted fixture; β is read from the speed-dependent load graph. Check actual offsets and all three moments, including stopping inertia. The catalog acceleration model is a = 1600(Va/1000)² with fixed cushioning or 400(Va/1000)² with hydraulic cushioning. For horizontal mounting, the catalog uses Mp = W(L1+A)/1000 and Mpo = Mp + Wa(L2+B)/(1000g). The transverse moment arm includes the guide offset C, giving C+L3. For vertical mounting, use the separate vertical formulas and add inertia to the static moment at the stroke end. The load/deflection graphs distinguish pitch, yaw and roll and the illustrated stroke; they do not promise zero deflection or one universal payload. The roll-deflection reference arm Lr for this bore is 65 mm. Mounting limits Parameter Details Tapped-hole body mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 10 mm Vertical end mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 6 mm Front-face fixture mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 8 mm Through-hole body mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.8 N·m; illustrated body thickness L 18 mm Top-face fixture mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 5.5 mm Keep screw penetration at least 0.5 mm below the maximum depth and within the actual detailed drawing. Mounting-table maxima do not override a shallower tapped hole shown in a particular view. Support the slide table while tightening fixture screws; holding only the body can transmit tightening torque into the guide and reduce accuracy. Maintain at least 3 mm separation from an adjacent magnetic cylinder to avoid sensor interference. Check all fixture clearances throughout travel. Use the selected symmetric or standard drawing for port access and stop placement. Begin flow adjustment slowly and remain within the energy, load and moment limits. Construction and materials The numbered entries follow the base-cylinder exploded drawing. Optional accessory assemblies are described separately above. Component Material 1 — Floating joint Low-carbon steel 2 — Bumper TPU 3 — Hex-socket screw Medium-carbon steel 4 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 5 — Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 6 — Rod seal NBR 7 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Bumper TPU 10 — Piston rod A Medium-carbon steel 11 — Piston rod B Stainless steel 12 — Body Aluminum alloy 13 — Magnet spacer Brass 14 — Magnet cushion NBR 15 — Magnet Sintered neodymium-iron-boron 16 — Piston seal NBR 17 — Piston Brass 18 — C retaining ring Spring steel 19 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 20 — Slide table Aluminum alloy 21 — Set screw Medium-carbon steel 22 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 23 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 24 — Crossed-roller guide assembly Assembly Series selection The standard strokes for the 12 mm bore are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100 mm. Options are fixed cushioning, A/AS/AF adjustable stops and B/BS/BF hydraulic shock absorbers. The option suffix identifies the equipped end(s). M5 ports apply to bores 6–16 mm; PT, G or NPT 1/8 choices are listed for bores 20/25 mm. Other bores or strokes require a specifically defined order. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify H (CMSH / DMSH / EMSH)-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 12 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 0.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses M5 × 0.8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 Flow control / silencer example PTLM5 / BSLM5 Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm This slide uses a twin-piston drive. The general single-cylinder circuit example is only an initial reference; size the actual flow supply for the complete actuator and required cycle time. Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The HLS cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in a matching sensor groove on the HLS cylinder body. Detection uses the magnet included in this S configuration. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes Use PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder chamber port; use straight PC4M5 fittings at the M5 valve A/B ports and keep the chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. Seat the M5 sealing gaskets correctly. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each selected M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads The gray fittings/controllers accept soft nylon or PU tube at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended controller-cap rotation torque is 0.05 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Check insertion and wrench clearance. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 4 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSLM5 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (M5×0.8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 10/8 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 352 g; an estimate using the same bore/stroke base cylinder. The published body weight does not separately include the selected accessory or port-thread variant, so this is not an official measured weight of the full configured assembly. The catalog lists the symmetric layout with the corresponding standard family. Actual product weight governs; this is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $302.58

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac HLS series: crossed-roller slide-table cylinder - HLS12X10SBF

  Specifications: HLS12X10SBF is a double-acting precision slide-table cylinder with a 12 mm bore, 10 mm stroke and built-in magnet. Its crossed-roller guide supports accurate linear travel. This is the standard layout. Hydraulic shock absorber at the retracting end. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 slide, clamp and stopper accessories (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning HLS Crossed-roller slide table; standard layout 12 12 mm bore X10 10 mm stroke S Built-in magnet BF Hydraulic shock absorber at the retracting end Technical specifications Parameter Details Action / working fluid Double acting / compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure — 2022 catalog 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Port M5 × 0.8 Standard cushioning Fixed rubber cushioning at both ends; selected stroke stops or shock absorbers as decoded above Guide / piston arrangement Crossed-roller guide with a twin-piston drive Applicable sensor family H profile: CMSH / DMSH / EMSH Edition note: the linked earlier English catalog specifies 0.15 MPa minimum operating pressure for this bore. The 2022 Chinese catalog specifies 0.15 MPa; the table above follows 2022. Use the requirements for the supplied edition when selecting the lower working pressure. Current-model dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the matching catalog drawing definitions; M and N in the body table are hole counts. Symmetric and standard layouts share table values but are not the same installation orientation. Parameter Details A 80 mm AB 70 mm AC 71 mm JB 40 mm JC 15 mm KB 35 mm LB 40 mm LC 15 mm M 4 holes N 2 holes PA 39.5 mm PB 10 mm R 25 mm Parameter Details height 32 mm front plate height 28 mm width 50 mm front plate thickness 8 mm front mounting 4–M4×0.7 depth6 top fixture screw M4×0.7 depth5.5 bottom screw M5×0.8 depth10 bottom counterbore Ø8 top transverse pitch 28 mm bottom transverse pitch 20 mm rear mounting 2–M5×0.8 depth8 rear local callouts 30 / 16 / 38 / 14.5 front local callouts 9 / 5 / 20 positioning hole Ø4 +0.03/0 depth3.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Selected stops and accessory dimensions The catalog accessory code for this configuration is F-HLS12BF. A comprises AS + AF; B comprises BS + BF. Standard and symmetric rear-end accessories are not interchangeable; the forward BS assembly is shared between the HLQ and HLS families only where the selection table lists it. F-HLS12BF: Hydraulic shock absorber at the retracting end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 17 mm at this end. Parameter Details A 31 mm B 29 mm C 18 mm D 16 mm E 40 mm E1 6 mm F 11 mm G 11 mm H 7 mm J M8×1 P M4 length12 Accessory-table letters describe the body-side and slide-side parts in the separate accessory drawing. Its 5 mm screw-adjustment entry, when present, is a component reference; use the installed-cylinder limits above for the assembled configuration. Parameter Details Specified shock absorber ACA0806-1N Maximum shock-absorber retaining-nut torque 1.67 N·m Do not adjust or remove the set screw at the back of the shock absorber: this can release oil and disable damping. A single-end BS or BF option provides hydraulic damping only at that specified end. Load and moment selection Parameter Details Reference Wmax 15 N; this is load weight, not kilograms Base / adjustable-stop allowable-energy reference Emax 0.05 J Hydraulic-stop Emax at a fitted B/BS/BF end 0.1 J; the opposite fixed-cushion end retains the base value on a single-end option Mpo maximum 33 N·m Myo maximum 34.3 N·m Mro maximum 30.9 N·m Mp maximum 7.3 N·m My maximum 7.3 N·m Mr maximum 5.8 N·m Compensation A 48 mm Compensation B 10 mm Compensation C 25 mm Mpo/Myo/Mro apply at the end of travel; Mp/My/Mr apply during travel. Compensation distances A/B/C in this load table are separate from body-dimension callouts with the same letters. Check the combined ratios Mp/Mpmax + My/Mymax + Mr/Mrmax ≤ 1, and separately Mpo/Mpomax + Myo/Myomax + Mro/Mromax ≤ 1. The catalog selection method uses E = 0.5 × (W/g) × (1.4 Va/1000)², with W in newtons, g = 9.81 m/s² and average speed Va in mm/s. Require E ≤ K × Emax and W ≤ K × β × Wmax. K is 1.0 for a top-mounted fixture and 0.6 for a front-mounted fixture; β is read from the speed-dependent load graph. Check actual offsets and all three moments, including stopping inertia. The catalog acceleration model is a = 1600(Va/1000)² with fixed cushioning or 400(Va/1000)² with hydraulic cushioning. For horizontal mounting, the catalog uses Mp = W(L1+A)/1000 and Mpo = Mp + Wa(L2+B)/(1000g). The transverse moment arm includes the guide offset C, giving C+L3. For vertical mounting, use the separate vertical formulas and add inertia to the static moment at the stroke end. The load/deflection graphs distinguish pitch, yaw and roll and the illustrated stroke; they do not promise zero deflection or one universal payload. The roll-deflection reference arm Lr for this bore is 65 mm. Mounting limits Parameter Details Tapped-hole body mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 10 mm Vertical end mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 6 mm Front-face fixture mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 8 mm Through-hole body mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.8 N·m; illustrated body thickness L 18 mm Top-face fixture mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 5.5 mm Keep screw penetration at least 0.5 mm below the maximum depth and within the actual detailed drawing. Mounting-table maxima do not override a shallower tapped hole shown in a particular view. Support the slide table while tightening fixture screws; holding only the body can transmit tightening torque into the guide and reduce accuracy. Maintain at least 3 mm separation from an adjacent magnetic cylinder to avoid sensor interference. Check all fixture clearances throughout travel. Use the selected symmetric or standard drawing for port access and stop placement. Begin flow adjustment slowly and remain within the energy, load and moment limits. Construction and materials The numbered entries follow the base-cylinder exploded drawing. Optional accessory assemblies are described separately above. Component Material 1 — Floating joint Low-carbon steel 2 — Bumper TPU 3 — Hex-socket screw Medium-carbon steel 4 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 5 — Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 6 — Rod seal NBR 7 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Bumper TPU 10 — Piston rod A Medium-carbon steel 11 — Piston rod B Stainless steel 12 — Body Aluminum alloy 13 — Magnet spacer Brass 14 — Magnet cushion NBR 15 — Magnet Sintered neodymium-iron-boron 16 — Piston seal NBR 17 — Piston Brass 18 — C retaining ring Spring steel 19 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 20 — Slide table Aluminum alloy 21 — Set screw Medium-carbon steel 22 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 23 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 24 — Crossed-roller guide assembly Assembly Series selection The standard strokes for the 12 mm bore are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100 mm. Options are fixed cushioning, A/AS/AF adjustable stops and B/BS/BF hydraulic shock absorbers. The option suffix identifies the equipped end(s). M5 ports apply to bores 6–16 mm; PT, G or NPT 1/8 choices are listed for bores 20/25 mm. Other bores or strokes require a specifically defined order. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify H (CMSH / DMSH / EMSH)-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 12 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 0.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses M5 × 0.8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 Flow control / silencer example PTLM5 / BSLM5 Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm This slide uses a twin-piston drive. The general single-cylinder circuit example is only an initial reference; size the actual flow supply for the complete actuator and required cycle time. Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The HLS cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in a matching sensor groove on the HLS cylinder body. Detection uses the magnet included in this S configuration. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes Use PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder chamber port; use straight PC4M5 fittings at the M5 valve A/B ports and keep the chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. Seat the M5 sealing gaskets correctly. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each selected M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads The gray fittings/controllers accept soft nylon or PU tube at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended controller-cap rotation torque is 0.05 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Check insertion and wrench clearance. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 4 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSLM5 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (M5×0.8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 10/8 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 352 g; an estimate using the same bore/stroke base cylinder. The published body weight does not separately include the selected accessory or port-thread variant, so this is not an official measured weight of the full configured assembly. The catalog lists the symmetric layout with the corresponding standard family. Actual product weight governs; this is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $254.35

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac HLS series: crossed-roller slide-table cylinder - HLS12X10SBS

  Specifications: HLS12X10SBS is a double-acting precision slide-table cylinder with a 12 mm bore, 10 mm stroke and built-in magnet. Its crossed-roller guide supports accurate linear travel. This is the standard layout. Hydraulic shock absorber at the forward end. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 slide, clamp and stopper accessories (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning HLS Crossed-roller slide table; standard layout 12 12 mm bore X10 10 mm stroke S Built-in magnet BS Hydraulic shock absorber at the forward end Technical specifications Parameter Details Action / working fluid Double acting / compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure — 2022 catalog 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Port M5 × 0.8 Standard cushioning Fixed rubber cushioning at both ends; selected stroke stops or shock absorbers as decoded above Guide / piston arrangement Crossed-roller guide with a twin-piston drive Applicable sensor family H profile: CMSH / DMSH / EMSH Edition note: the linked earlier English catalog specifies 0.15 MPa minimum operating pressure for this bore. The 2022 Chinese catalog specifies 0.15 MPa; the table above follows 2022. Use the requirements for the supplied edition when selecting the lower working pressure. Current-model dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the matching catalog drawing definitions; M and N in the body table are hole counts. Symmetric and standard layouts share table values but are not the same installation orientation. Parameter Details A 80 mm AB 70 mm AC 71 mm JB 40 mm JC 15 mm KB 35 mm LB 40 mm LC 15 mm M 4 holes N 2 holes PA 39.5 mm PB 10 mm R 25 mm Parameter Details height 32 mm front plate height 28 mm width 50 mm front plate thickness 8 mm front mounting 4–M4×0.7 depth6 top fixture screw M4×0.7 depth5.5 bottom screw M5×0.8 depth10 bottom counterbore Ø8 top transverse pitch 28 mm bottom transverse pitch 20 mm rear mounting 2–M5×0.8 depth8 rear local callouts 30 / 16 / 38 / 14.5 front local callouts 9 / 5 / 20 positioning hole Ø4 +0.03/0 depth3.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Selected stops and accessory dimensions The catalog accessory code for this configuration is F-HLQ12BS. A comprises AS + AF; B comprises BS + BF. Standard and symmetric rear-end accessories are not interchangeable; the forward BS assembly is shared between the HLQ and HLS families only where the selection table lists it. F-HLQ12BS: Hydraulic shock absorber at the forward end. The installed-cylinder drawing gives a maximum adjustment of 17.5 mm at this end. Parameter Details A 11 mm B 29 mm C 14 mm D 15.5 mm E 40 mm E1 6 mm F 11 mm G 7 mm M M8×1 P M4 length16 H 20 mm I 9 mm J 13.5 mm Q M4 length12 Accessory-table letters describe the body-side and slide-side parts in the separate accessory drawing. Its 5 mm screw-adjustment entry, when present, is a component reference; use the installed-cylinder limits above for the assembled configuration. Parameter Details Specified shock absorber ACA0806-1N Maximum shock-absorber retaining-nut torque 1.67 N·m Do not adjust or remove the set screw at the back of the shock absorber: this can release oil and disable damping. A single-end BS or BF option provides hydraulic damping only at that specified end. Load and moment selection Parameter Details Reference Wmax 15 N; this is load weight, not kilograms Base / adjustable-stop allowable-energy reference Emax 0.05 J Hydraulic-stop Emax at a fitted B/BS/BF end 0.1 J; the opposite fixed-cushion end retains the base value on a single-end option Mpo maximum 33 N·m Myo maximum 34.3 N·m Mro maximum 30.9 N·m Mp maximum 7.3 N·m My maximum 7.3 N·m Mr maximum 5.8 N·m Compensation A 48 mm Compensation B 10 mm Compensation C 25 mm Mpo/Myo/Mro apply at the end of travel; Mp/My/Mr apply during travel. Compensation distances A/B/C in this load table are separate from body-dimension callouts with the same letters. Check the combined ratios Mp/Mpmax + My/Mymax + Mr/Mrmax ≤ 1, and separately Mpo/Mpomax + Myo/Myomax + Mro/Mromax ≤ 1. The catalog selection method uses E = 0.5 × (W/g) × (1.4 Va/1000)², with W in newtons, g = 9.81 m/s² and average speed Va in mm/s. Require E ≤ K × Emax and W ≤ K × β × Wmax. K is 1.0 for a top-mounted fixture and 0.6 for a front-mounted fixture; β is read from the speed-dependent load graph. Check actual offsets and all three moments, including stopping inertia. The catalog acceleration model is a = 1600(Va/1000)² with fixed cushioning or 400(Va/1000)² with hydraulic cushioning. For horizontal mounting, the catalog uses Mp = W(L1+A)/1000 and Mpo = Mp + Wa(L2+B)/(1000g). The transverse moment arm includes the guide offset C, giving C+L3. For vertical mounting, use the separate vertical formulas and add inertia to the static moment at the stroke end. The load/deflection graphs distinguish pitch, yaw and roll and the illustrated stroke; they do not promise zero deflection or one universal payload. The roll-deflection reference arm Lr for this bore is 65 mm. Mounting limits Parameter Details Tapped-hole body mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 10 mm Vertical end mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 6 mm Front-face fixture mounting M5 × 0.8; maximum torque 4.4 N·m; maximum screw penetration 8 mm Through-hole body mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.8 N·m; illustrated body thickness L 18 mm Top-face fixture mounting M4 × 0.7; maximum torque 2.1 N·m; maximum screw penetration 5.5 mm Keep screw penetration at least 0.5 mm below the maximum depth and within the actual detailed drawing. Mounting-table maxima do not override a shallower tapped hole shown in a particular view. Support the slide table while tightening fixture screws; holding only the body can transmit tightening torque into the guide and reduce accuracy. Maintain at least 3 mm separation from an adjacent magnetic cylinder to avoid sensor interference. Check all fixture clearances throughout travel. Use the selected symmetric or standard drawing for port access and stop placement. Begin flow adjustment slowly and remain within the energy, load and moment limits. Construction and materials The numbered entries follow the base-cylinder exploded drawing. Optional accessory assemblies are described separately above. Component Material 1 — Floating joint Low-carbon steel 2 — Bumper TPU 3 — Hex-socket screw Medium-carbon steel 4 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 5 — Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 6 — Rod seal NBR 7 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Bumper TPU 10 — Piston rod A Medium-carbon steel 11 — Piston rod B Stainless steel 12 — Body Aluminum alloy 13 — Magnet spacer Brass 14 — Magnet cushion NBR 15 — Magnet Sintered neodymium-iron-boron 16 — Piston seal NBR 17 — Piston Brass 18 — C retaining ring Spring steel 19 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 20 — Slide table Aluminum alloy 21 — Set screw Medium-carbon steel 22 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 23 — Hex-socket pan-head screw Medium-carbon steel 24 — Crossed-roller guide assembly Assembly Series selection The standard strokes for the 12 mm bore are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100 mm. Options are fixed cushioning, A/AS/AF adjustable stops and B/BS/BF hydraulic shock absorbers. The option suffix identifies the equipped end(s). M5 ports apply to bores 6–16 mm; PT, G or NPT 1/8 choices are listed for bores 20/25 mm. Other bores or strokes require a specifically defined order. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify H (CMSH / DMSH / EMSH)-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 12 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 0.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses M5 × 0.8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 Flow control / silencer example PTLM5 / BSLM5 Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm This slide uses a twin-piston drive. The general single-cylinder circuit example is only an initial reference; size the actual flow supply for the complete actuator and required cycle time. Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The HLS cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in a matching sensor groove on the HLS cylinder body. Detection uses the magnet included in this S configuration. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes Use PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder chamber port; use straight PC4M5 fittings at the M5 valve A/B ports and keep the chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. Seat the M5 sealing gaskets correctly. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each selected M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads The gray fittings/controllers accept soft nylon or PU tube at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended controller-cap rotation torque is 0.05 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Check insertion and wrench clearance. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 4 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSLM5 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (M5×0.8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 10/8 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 352 g; an estimate using the same bore/stroke base cylinder. The published body weight does not separately include the selected accessory or port-thread variant, so this is not an official measured weight of the full configured assembly. The catalog lists the symmetric layout with the corresponding standard family. Actual product weight governs; this is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $261.48

  View options

Show more products